Ptx_prm_lg_172288a Ptx Prm Lg 172288a

ptx_prm_lg_172288a ptx_prm_lg_172288a

ptx_prm_lg_172288a ptx_prm_lg_172288a

ptx_prm_lg_172288a ptx_prm_lg_172288a

User Manual: ptx_prm_lg_172288a

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 310 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

LG Programmer’s Reference Manual
®
The Printronix P5000 series with DEC LG Emulation
172288-001, Rev A
LG Programmer’s Reference Manual
The Printronix P5000 series with DEC LG Emulation
®
Trademark Acknowledgements
Trademark Acknowledgements
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems.
Chatillon is a trademark of John Chatillon & Sons, Inc.
ENERGY STAR®is a registered trademark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR®Partner,
Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR®
guidelines for energy efficiency.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
IGP is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
Intelligent Printer Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation.
LinePrinter Plus is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
PC-DOS is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
PGL is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
PrintNet is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
Printronix is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
PSA is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems.
RibbonMinder is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
SureStak is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
Thermaline is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.
Torx is a registered trademark of Camcar/Textron Inc.
Utica is a registered trademark of Cooper Power Tools.
Printronix, Inc. makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding
this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix, Inc. shall not
be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this
material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or
consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or
use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Use of the term “LG Emulation” is to indicate compatibility with products from
Digital Equipment Corporation. No claim of affiliation with Digital Equipment
Corporation or Compaq Computer Corporation is made.
COPYRIGHT © 2000, PRINTRONIX, INC.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction......................................................... 13
About This Manual............................................................................... 13
How to Use This Manual ............................................................... 13
The LGplus Line Matrix Printer............................................................ 14
Printer Features ................................................................................... 15
Printer Emulations......................................................................... 15
Text Formatting and Language Options........................................ 15
Bar Code Formatting.................................................................... 16
Diagnostics.................................................................................... 16
Printing Speed ..................................................................................... 16
2 LG Emulation Control Codes.............................. 17
LG Emulation....................................................................................... 17
Bar Code Printing .............................................................................. 17
Print Mode and Plot Mode ................................................................... 18
Optimizing Print Mode ......................................................................... 19
Optimizing Plot Mode........................................................................... 19
Character Printing................................................................................ 19
DEC Multinational Character Set......................................................... 21
Selecting Graphic Character Sets ....................................................... 22
Control Code Types ............................................................................ 23
Special Parsing Requirements ........................................................... 32
Control Code Description Format ....................................................... 34
Control Code Index.............................................................................. 35
Set/Reset Mode ................................................................................. 40
Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM) ...................................................... 41
Carriage Return/New Line Mode (DECCRNLM) ................................. 42
Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) ............................................................... 43
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) ........................................................... 44
Set Page Orientation (DECSPO) ....................................................... 45
Position Unit Mode (PUM) ................................................................. 46
Force Plot Mode (DECFPM) .............................................................. 47
Select Size Unit (SSU) ....................................................................... 48
Graphic Size Selection (GSS) ............................................................ 49
Graphic Size Modification (GSM) ................................................... 50
Setting Plot Density .......................................................................... 51
Table of Contents
Set Graphics Density (DECSGD) .................................................. 52
Spacing .............................................................................................. 54
Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI) ............................................................ 55
Select Vertical (Line) Spacing (SVS) ................................................. 57
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) ........................................................... 58
Select Horizontal (Character) Spacing (SHS) ..................................... 59
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) ................................................... 60
Vertical Format .................................................................................. 61
Load Vertical Format Unit (VFU) ..................................................... 62
End Load (VFU) ............................................................................... 63
Channel Command ............................................................................. 64
Forms .................................................................................................. 66
Loading Forms Sequence (DECLFM) ................................................. 67
Form Types ........................................................................................ 71
Start Forms Sequence (DECIFM) ...................................................... 72
Terminate Forms Sequence (DECTFM) ............................................ 73
Delete Forms Sequence (DECDFM) ................................................. 73
Forms Considerations.......................................................................... 74
Request Forms Status (DECFMSR) .................................................. 75
Form Status Report (DECRFMS) ...................................................... 75
Logos................................................................................................... 76
Loading Logos Sequence (DECLLG) ................................................ 76
Select Logo Sequence (DECILG) ...................................................... 78
Deleting Logos Sequence (DECDLG) ............................................... 78
Request Logo Status (DECRLGS) .................................................... 79
Logo Status Report (DECLGSR) ....................................................... 79
Page Print Area and Margins ............................................................. 80
Changing the Print Area .................................................................... 81
Page Format Select (PFS)................................................................... 82
Set Lines Per Physical Page (DECSLPP) ......................................... 86
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM) ........................................ 87
Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM) ........................................... 88
Active Column and Active Line (Cursor Motion) ................................ 89
Forward Index (IND) .......................................................................... 89
Reverse Index (RI) ............................................................................. 90
Next Line (NEL) ................................................................................. 90
Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) ................................................... 91
Horizontal Position Relative (HPR) .................................................... 91
Horizontal Position Backward (HPB) ................................................. 92
Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) ....................................................... 92
Vertical Position Relative (VPR) ........................................................ 93
Vertical Position Backward (VPB) ...................................................... 93
Table of Contents
Cursor Up (CUU) ............................................................................... 94
Partial Line Up (PLU) - Superscripting ............................................... 94
Partial Line Down (PLD) - Subscripting ............................................. 95
Tab Stops .......................................................................................... 95
Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS) .............................................. 96
Horizontal Tab Stops (HTS) ............................................................... 97
Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS) ................................................... 97
Vertical Tab Stops (VTS) ................................................................... 98
Tab Clear (TBC) ................................................................................ 98
Character Set Selection ..................................................................... 99
Select Character Set Sequences (SCS) .......................................... 100
Assign User Preference Supplemental Set (DECAUPSS) ............... 102
Product Identification (DA) ............................................................... 104
Printer Status Requests and Reports .............................................. 104
Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer Responses ................ 105
Assigning and Selecting Font Files .................................................. 109
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF) ......................................... 110
Selecting Fonts for Printing (SGR) .................................................. 112
Deleting Fonts from RAM (DECLFF) ............................................... 113
Font Status Sequences ................................................................... 113
Request Font Status (DECRFS) ...................................................... 114
Font Status Report (DECFSR) ........................................................ 115
Character Attributes (SGR) .............................................................. 116
Character Expansion (GSM) ............................................................ 117
Bold Printing .................................................................................... 119
Crossed-Out Text ............................................................................ 120
Double Underlined Text ................................................................... 121
Italic Printing .................................................................................... 121
Overlined ......................................................................................... 122
Turn Off All Attributes ................................................................... 122
Underlined Text ............................................................................... 123
Justification (JFY) ............................................................................ 124
Sixel Graphics Processing ............................................................... 126
Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode .................................. 130
Drawing Vectors (DECVEC) ............................................................ 137
Block Characters ............................................................................. 138
Setting Block Character Parameters (DECBCS) ............................. 138
Start Block Character Mode (DECBLOCKC) .................................... 140
Stop Block Character Mode .............................................................. 140
Reset to Initial State (RIS) ................................................................. 141
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) ........................................................ 141
Selecting LinePrinter Plus Emulations via DECIPEM........................ 142
Table of Contents
Selecting LinePrinter Plus Emulations via SOCS ............................. 143
7-Bit and 8-Bit Transmissions and Interpretations ............................ 144
Enter Draft Mode .............................................................................. 145
Exit Draft Mode ................................................................................. 145
Default Values and States ................................................................ 146
3 Character Sets.................................................. 151
Introduction........................................................................................ 151
Selecting the Character Set and Language....................................... 151
OCR-A and OCR-B ..................................................................... 151
ASCII Character Set.................................................................... 152
DEC Multinational Character Sets .............................................. 155
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets ................................ 161
4 Bar Codes......................................................... 203
Bar Codes ......................................................................................... 203
Select Bar Codes Attributes Sequence (DECSBCA) ........................ 203
Start Bar Coding (DECBARC) .......................................................... 207
Stop Bar Coding (Return from Other Coding System: ROCS) .......... 207
Bar Code Characteristics ................................................................. 208
Number of Bars per Character.................................................... 208
START, STOP, and CENTER Code Characters ....................... 209
Quiet Zone ................................................................................ 209
Intercharacter Gap .................................................................... 209
Number of Characters in a Bar Code.......................................... 209
Checksums ............................................................................... 209
Parity ......................................................................................... 209
Multiple Bar Codes ..................................................................... 210
Bar Code Styles ............................................................................... 211
Code 39 ........................................................................................... 211
Extended Code 39 ........................................................................... 211
Code 11 ........................................................................................... 213
Codabar a/t ...................................................................................... 213
Codabar b/n ..................................................................................... 214
Codabar c/* ...................................................................................... 214
Codabar d/e ..................................................................................... 215
EAN-8 .............................................................................................. 215
EAN-13 ............................................................................................ 216
Interleaved 2 of 5 ............................................................................. 216
UPC-A .............................................................................................. 217
UPC-E .............................................................................................. 218
Postnet .............................................................................................. 220
Code 128 - USS................................................................................. 220
Table of Contents
Code 128 - UCC ............................................................................... 228
Density and Spacing Between Bar Codes ........................................ 229
ALGEmulation
Character Sets....................................................... 231
Introduction........................................................................................ 231
LG Emulation Character Set Charts .................................................. 231
U.S. ASCII................................................................................... 238
DEC Finnish ................................................................................ 239
French ......................................................................................... 240
DEC French Canadian ................................................................ 241
German ....................................................................................... 242
Italian........................................................................................... 243
JIS Roman .................................................................................. 244
DEC Norwegian/Danish .............................................................. 245
Spanish ....................................................................................... 246
DEC Swedish .............................................................................. 247
DEC Great Britain ....................................................................... 248
ISO Norwegian/Danish................................................................ 249
DEC Dutch .................................................................................. 250
DEC Swiss .................................................................................. 251
DEC Portuguese ......................................................................... 252
VT100 Graphics .......................................................................... 253
DEC Supplemental...................................................................... 254
DEC Technical ............................................................................ 255
ISO Katakana.............................................................................. 256
7-Bit Hebrew ............................................................................... 257
7-Bit Turkish ................................................................................ 258
Greek Supplemental ................................................................... 259
Hebrew Supplemental................................................................. 260
Turkish Supplemental ................................................................. 261
LG Emulation 96-Character Sets....................................................... 262
ISO Latin 1 .................................................................................. 263
ISO Latin 2 .................................................................................. 264
ISO Latin 5 .................................................................................. 265
ISO Latin 9 .................................................................................. 266
ISO Cyrillic .................................................................................. 267
ISO Greek ................................................................................... 268
ISO Hebrew................................................................................. 269
Table of Contents
B Interface Configuration with the VMS Operating
System................................................................... 271
Parallel Interface................................................................................ 271
Serial Interface................................................................................... 272
C Type Family IDs, Font IDs, Font File IDs ......... 273
“Built-In" Font File IDs........................................................................ 273
Font File ID Field Definitions ............................................................. 274
Type Family IDs................................................................................. 275
Font File IDs ...................................................................................... 275
D Print Samples................................................... 283
Introduction........................................................................................ 283
Creating Block Characters................................................................. 283
Bar Codes.......................................................................................... 285
Logos................................................................................................. 287
Sixel Graphics.................................................................................... 288
Forms................................................................................................. 289
Vertical Format Unit (VFU) ................................................................ 294
E Glossary ........................................................... 295
13
1Introduction
About This Manual
This manual is designed so that you can quickly find the information you need
to program the Printronix DEC LG emulation that is provided with your printer.
Brief descriptions follow for each chapter in this book:
•Chapter 1, “Introduction.” Provides an overview of this book, printer
features, and line matrix printing technology.
•Chapter 2, “LG Emulation Control Codes.” Describes the LG
emulation control code commands that can be sent to the printer through
the host data stream. These commands allow you to send instructions to
the printer and configure many LG emulation parameters.
•Chapter 3, “Character Sets.” Includes tables that list the hexadecimal
and decimal codes for the foreign language and special character sets
provided by the LG emulation.
•Chapter 4, “Bar Codes.” Lists and describes the LG emulation control
codes used for printing bar codes.
•Appendices. Several appendices provide character set charts for the LG
emulation, and information on configuring the VMS™ operating system
for use with the DEC LG printer.
How to Use This Manual
You can locate information three ways:
•Use the Table of Contents at the front of the manual.
•Use the Index at the back of the manual for references to topics and
tasks described in this manual.
•Use the Glossary at the back of the manual to find definitions for
commonly used terminology.
Warnings and Special Information
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
Conditions that could harm you as well as damage the equipment.
CAUTION
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
IMPORTANT
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Information affecting printer operation.
14
Chapter 1 The DEC LG Emulation Line Matrix Printer
Related Documentation
Following is a list of related documentation for the DEC LG Emulation printer.
•
Printronix DEC LG Emulation Series Maintenance Manual
- Explains how
to maintain and repair theDEC LG Emulation line matrix printer at the field
service level of maintenance. This manual covers alignments and
adjustments, preventive and corrective maintenance, troubleshooting,
and basic principles of operation.
•
Printronix DEC LG Series Operator's Guide
- Describes the keys on the
control panel and provides quick reference information on daily printer
operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons.
•
Printronix DEC LG Series Setup Guide
- Describes how to unpack, install,
configure, run diagnostics, and clean the printer, and how to troubleshoot
simple fault conditions.
•
Printronix DEC LG Series LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference
Manual
- Describes the host control codes and character sets available
with the LinePrinter Plusprinter control language.
•
Printronix DEC LG Series IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual
-
Provides information used with the optional Code VPrintronix
emulation enhancement feature. The Code V Printronix emulation allows
you to create and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and expanded
characters; create other graphics, and merge graphics with alphanumeric
data as a document is printed.
•
Printronix DEC LG Series IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual
-
Provides information used with the optional IGP/PGLPrintronix
emulation enhancement feature. The IGP Printronix emulation allows you
to create and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and expanded
characters; create other graphics, and merge graphics with alphanumeric
data as a document is printed.
The DEC LG Emulation Line Matrix Printer
The Printronix DEC LG Emulation printer is a line matrix printer. It uses a
variable-speed shuttle, micro-step paper feed control, and multi-phase
hammer firing to generate a wide range of horizontal and vertical dot densities
with no speed penalties.
Printer Emulations
15
Printer Features
Several standard features are provided with the Printronix DEC LG Emulation
printer, as described below.
Printer Emulations
Six printer emulations (or protocols) are selectable at the control panel:
•LG emulation
•ProprinterXL emulation
•EpsonFX-1050 emulation
•P-Series emulation
•IGP/PGL - Printronix Graphics Language emulation (optional upgrade)
•IGP/VGL - Code V Graphics Language emulation (optional upgrade)
The DEC LG emulation may be configured using the emulation host control
codes described in this book, or can be configured via the control panel, as
described in the
Setup Guide.
The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, and P-Series emulation host control codes are
described in the
Printronix DEC LG Emulation LinePrinter Plus Programming
Reference Manual
. (The LinePrinter Plus emulations can also be configured
via the control panel, as described in the
Setup Guide
.)ThePGLandVGL
emulations are described in the user's manuals provided for those
enhancement options.
Text Formatting and Language Options
You can modify several parameters used primarily for printing text, either by
means of the host data stream or the configuration menus.
The text formatting and language options include:
•Selectable print quality
•Selectable alternate horizontal and vertical dot densities that enable you
to tailor output to a wider variety of printing requirements
•Selectable forms length and width
•Character-by-character attribute specification
1.Selectable pitch: normal, expanded, and compressed
2.Bold print
3.Overscoring
4.Single underline
5.Superscript and subscript printing
•Resident multinational character sets
16
Chapter 1 Printing Speed
Bar Code Formatting
Several LG emulation control codes that allow you to define and print bar
codes are described in Chapter 4.
Diagnostics
The
Setup Guide
for these printers discusses the following diagnostic
features in more detail:
•Built-in diagnostic self-tests
•Configuration printout
•Data stream hexadecimal code printout
Printing Speed
The speed at which text prints is measured in lines per minute (lpm). This
speed is inversely proportional to the number of dot rows required to produce
a character line, regardless of the number of characters in the line. More dot
rows are required to print lowercase characters with descenders;
consequently, those character lines print at a fractionally lower rate.
The DEC LG Emulation printer also prints dot-addressable graphic images.
The speed at which graphics are plotted is measured in inches per minute
(ipm). Unidirectional plotting produces slightly better print quality, and takes
about twice as long as bidirectional plotting. You can select either plotting
mode from the control panel.
Printing and plotting rates also vary according to the print quality you select.
Print quality refers to the way you instruct the printer to create characters. If,
for example, you select near letter quality (NLQ), the printer uses more dot
rows to form characters than if you choose high speed (HS) print quality.
Character formation and print speed are faster in HS because the printer uses
fewer dot rows to form characters. Vertical dot density is thus a factor in
printing speed. Nominal printing rates are charted in Appendix A of the
Setup
Guide.
17
2LG Emulation Control
Codes
LG Emulation
Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of other
printer control languages. LG is the default printer emulation when the printer
is powered on. If LG is not the active emulation, use the control panel
configuration menus to select the LG option nested under the “ACTIVE
EMULATION” main menu selection. (See Chapter 4 in your Printronix P5000
series with DEC LG Emulation
Setup Guide
.)
A printer control language (also called a printer protocol) is the coding system
used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and
command sequences.
A printer and its host computer must use the same printer control language. In
this manual, the terms printer control language, emulation, and protocol are
synonymous.
Bar Code Printing
Bar code printing is selected by control sequences, not by the operator control
panel.
Bar code printing, including the control codes related to bar code printing, is
described in Chapter 4 of this book.
18
Chapter 2 PrintModeandPlotMode
Print Mode and Plot Mode
The DEC LG Emulation provides a print mode and a plot mode for printing
text and graphic elements, and a set of print fonts and plot fonts that are used
in each mode. Some example print fonts and plot fonts are listed in the table
of Ps2 values on page 109. A report of the available font files can be
requested using the font status sequences (see page 112), if you have a
serial connection to the printer.
In print mode, the DEC LG Emulation can print only the set of “print fonts.”
This mode is often preferable, because it is very fast and optimized for
printing text. The quality of the print font determines the print density in this
mode.
Plot mode handles graphic elements such as vectors and bar codes as well
as many built-in DEC plot fonts. Because graphic elements and built-in DEC
fonts are plotted, this mode is much slower than printer mode.
The printer will automatically switch between print mode and plot mode,
depending on the current print requirements. The default mode is print mode,
but the printer will often switch to plot mode when various densities are
needed to plot graphic elements. For instance, the DECSGD command will
allow many different combinations of horizontal and vertical densities that
cannot be used in print mode.
Plot mode is performed in graphic passes. In other words, all elements in a
given density are printed in the same paper motion. If the user chooses ten
elements in one density and then changes to another density, the ten
previous elements are printed and the paper moves forward in one pass. The
elements printed at the new density may cause reverse paper motion,
depending on where they are to be printed. Therefore, the user should
consider this when combining elements of various densities on a form.
When choosing print or plot fonts via the SGR command, the user should also
be aware that these fonts will only be used in their respective mode. For
instance, if the printer is in print mode, a selection of a plot font will not be
chosen until the printer is forced into plot mode. Likewise, if the printer is in
plot mode and a print font is chosen, this font will not be active until the printer
returns from plot mode to print mode.
19
Optimizing Print Mode
WhenyousendacommandsuchasSPI,DECSHORP,SHS,andSGRtothe
printer to alter character spacing, font size, and font attributes, the printer will
switch to plot mode, causing the density to change and the printer throughput
to decrease.
To optimize print mode, set the Print Mode option to Enable with the control
panel. The switch to plot mode will be avoided and printer throughput will be
increased considerably.
Optimizing Plot Mode
Print mode text and graphic elements print at different densities. When the
two are mixed, a paper reversal can occur because of the different densities.
When the Plot Mode option is set to Enable from the control panel, Postnet
barcodes are printed in a Data Processing density (120 x 75 dpi) in the
following printing conditions:
1. Printer is currently in print mode.
2. Current density is 120 x 75 dpi.
3. Printer is in the portrait orientation.
Printing in Data Processing density speeds applications which use Postnet
barcodes and text. It reduces the chances of reverse motion and improves
throughput.
If the Plot Mode option is disabled, Postnet barcodes are printed in a Graphic
density (via Plot Mode) as dictated by the DECSGD command.
Character Printing
Print data sent to the printer consist of two types of character codes:
•Printable Characters are codes representing alphabet characters,
punctuation marks, and graphic symbols
•Control Codes are one or more bytes that instruct the printer how to
process and print characters and graphics
The DEC LG Emulation processes the character codes of the DEC
Multinational Character Set (page 21). Characters and codes from this chart
are identified and located by their column and row numbers. For example, the
ASCII character SUB is identified as 1/10, which means that it is located at
column 1 row 10.
You may send data from the host computer in either 7-bit or 8-bit form. (The
conversion processes from 7-bit to 8-bit form and vice versa are described on
page 28.)
20
Chapter 2 Character Printing
Printable Characters
Columns 0 through 7 of the DEC Multinational Character Set (page 21), are
the standard ASCII printable character set used in a 7-bit environment. If you
choose an 8-bit environment, the printable character set expands to include
columns 8 through 15.
If word length is 7-bits, printable characters are only generated from columns
2 through 7. If word length is set at 8-bits, printable characters can be
generated from columns 2 through 7 and columns 10 through 15. (Note that in
an 8-bit environment, columns 0 through 7 have the 8th bit set to zero, while
columns 8 through 15 always have the 8th bit set to 1.)
NOTE: The actual characters printed may not always be those shown in the
DEC Multinational Character Set because printable characters in the
column/row positions vary, depending upon the character set used.
21
DEC Multinational Character Set
B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0
B5 0 01101100011011
COLUMN
01234567
BITS
ROW
B4 B2B3 B1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000
00 10
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
NUL
EOT
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
DC1
DC3
CAN
SUB
ESC
(XON)
(XOFF)
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
18
24
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
+
,
-
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
0
0
0
0
0
0
^
*
U.S. ASCII CHARACTER SETASCII
Control Codes
00001111
0001101100011011
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
213
139
214
140
215
141
216
142
217
143
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
98
152
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
11111111
¡
¿
ªº
N~
*
+
-
b
<< >>
¢
ÿ
¥
£
§
µ
W
Á
À
Â
~
A
Æ
Å
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ë
Ê
Î
Ï
Ì
Í
Ó
Ò
Ö
Ô
~O
Ø
Ù
Ü
Û
á
í
ó
ú
~
n
æ
ç
ä
à
å
^
a
~
a
è
é
ë
^
e
î
ï
ì
ö
ò
~
o
ü
û
ù
ø
!
¤
**
Ú
Y
..
KEY
CHARACTER
ESC 33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
10 1 1
B4 B2B3 B1
B7 B6 B5
001
BITS
w
ô
DEC SUPPLEMENTAL
Control Codes
Additional
CHARACTER SET
IND
NEL
HTS
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
CSI
ST
(Not
Used)
(Not
Used)
Columns 8 and 9 can
be converted to 7-bit
Escape sequences.
Columns 10 thru 15
are only accessed
B8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14
12
2
3
7-bit mode or bit 8 set to zero
B8 0
DEC Multinational Character Set
in 8-bit mode.
22
Chapter 2 Selecting Graphic Character Sets
Selecting Graphic Character Sets
Several graphic character sets reside in DEC LG Emulation including U.S.
ASCII, DEC Supplemental, DEC Technical, and VT100 Graphics.
Graphic character sets are selected for printing as follows:
1. Designate the set as one of the logical G0, G1, G2, or G3 sets.
2. Map (invoke) one of the G-sets into the graphic left (GL) or graphic right
(GR) logical set. (In a 7-bit environment, only the GL set is available.)
Figure 1 shows the process of designating and invoking character sets. The
Select Character Set (SCS) command designates the graphic character set
(see page 99). The Locking Shift and Single Shift commands map the logical
sets into the GL or GR set. See Locking and Single Shifts in this chapter.
When you select the character set using the control panel, it is done in two
sections. Under the GL menu, selecting a different character set will put it in
the logical G0 and G1 sets. GL is then mapped to G0.
Under the GR menu, choosing a character set will put it in the logical G2, G3,
and User Preference Supplemental Set. GR is then mapped to G2.
Figure 1. Designating and Invoking Character Sets
23
Control Code Types
Control codes do not print, they drive printer activity. The printer recognizes
two kinds of control codes:
•Single-byte control codes
•Escape sequences that include two or more bytes of control code
information
The following topics describe single-byte control codes and Escape
sequences in detail.
Control Codes
A control code is a single (one-byte) non-printing character that instructs the
printer to perform a specific operation. When the printer receives a control
character, it immediately performs the control operation instead of printing a
graphic character. The DEC LG Emulation printer recognizes two sets of
control characters:
•ASCII control codes (7-bit codes)
•Additional control codes (8-bit codes)
ASCII Control Codes
Table 1 defines the ASCII control codes recognized by the printer in LG
emulation mode. These codes are located in columns 0 and 1 of the Digital
Multinational Character Set (page 21), and the column/row coordinates from
this chart are printed beneath the Mnemonic category in Table 1. These
control codes are available in a 7-bit data environment or in an 8-bit
environment if bit 8 is set to 1.
NOTE: On many computers, an ASCII control code can be sent from the
input keyboard by holding down the CTRL key while depressing the
key specified in Table 1.
Additional Control Codes
The additional control codes are 8-bit control characters defined by ANSI and
LG unique sequences, and are available in an 8-bit data environment when
bit 8 is set to 1.Table 2 defines the additional control codes recognized by the
printer in LG emulation mode. These codes are in columns 8 and 9 of the
Digital Multinational Character Set (page 21), and the column/row coordinates
from this chart are printed beneath the Mnemonic category in Table 2.
The 8-bit additional control codes may be sent in 7-bit form as equivalent
escape sequences. Equivalent 7-bit escape sequences for the 8-bit additional
control codes are listed in Table 3. Control code conversion from 7-bit to 8-bit
data environments, and vice versa, is discussed on page 28.
24
Chapter 2 Control Code Types
Table 1. ASCII Control Codes
Mnemonic
Column/Row Name KeyPressed
with CTRL Function
BEL
0/7 Bell G When a <BEL> control code is received,
the printer produces a short audible
tone.
HT
0/9 Horizontal Tab I HT advances the active tab position to
the next horizontal tab stop on the line,
or to the right margin if there are no more
tab stops.The printer initially sets a
horizontal tab stop every eight
characters. Tab stops may be located
either at column numbers or at physical
positions on the page.
LF
0/10 Line Feed J LF advances the active line vertically by
one line. If less than one vertical line
space remains on the page, LF sets the
active line to the first line on the next
page. If line feed/new line (LNM) is set,
LF also advances the active column to
the left margin.
VT
0/11 Vertical Tab K VT moves the active line to the next
vertical tab stop. The DEC LG Emulation
printer initially sets a vertical tab stop for
every line on the page.
FF
0/12 Form Feed L FF advances the active line to the first
printable line on the next page.
CR
0/13 Carriage Return M CR returns the active column to the left
margin. If carriage return/new line mode
is set, CR also advances the active line
to the next line.
SO
0/14 Shift Out N SO locks character set G1 into GL.
SI
0/15 Shift In O SI locks character set G0 into GL.
DCI (XON)
1/1 Device Control 1 Q DC1 informs the host computer that the
printer is ready to receive data.
DC3 (XOFF)
1/3 Device Control 3 S DC3 tells the host computer to pause
before sending more data until the
printer sends DC1.
25
CAN
1/8 Cancel X CAN immediately ends an escape or
control sequence. The printer interprets
the characters following CAN as
normal.CAN also cancels a Device
Control String (DCS) when received
within the command string of that DCS.
SUB
1/10 Substitute Z SUB immediately ends an escape or
control sequence. SUB replaces a
character received with an error in the
sequence. SUB prints as a space
character for sixel data.
ESC
1/11 Escape [ ESC introduces an escape or control
sequence. If received in the middle of a
sequence, ESC immediately ends the
sequence and starts a new sequence.
ESC also immediately ends a Device
Control String (DCS).
BS
0/8 Backspace H BS moves the active horizontal position
back one Horizontal Advance Increment.
Table 1. ASCII Control Codes
Mnemonic
Column/Row Name KeyPressed
with CTRL Function
26
Chapter 2 Control Code Types
Table 2. Additional Control Codes
Mneumonic
Column/Row Name Function
IND
8/4 Index IND moves the active position down to
the same position on the next line. If the
new position is below the bottom margin,
the active position moves to the top of
the next page.
NEL
8/5 Next Line NEL moves the active position to the left
margin on the next line. If the new
position is below the bottom margin, the
active position moves to the top of the
next page.
HTS
8/8 Horizontal Tab Set HTS sets a horizontal tab at the active
column.
VTS
8/10 Vertical Tab Set VTS sets a vertical tab at the active line.
PLD
8/11 Partial Line Down PLD moves the active position down
one-half line. The distance moved is
specified as a parameter of the font, not
by vertical spacing escape sequences.
PLU
8/12 Partial Line Up PLU moves the active position up one-
half line. The distance moved is
specified as a parameter of the font, not
by vertical spacing escape sequences.
RI
8/13 Reverse Index RI moves the active line position up to
the same position on the preceding line.
SS2
8/14 Single Shift 2 SS2 moves character set G2 into Gl, to
print one character.
SS3
8/15 Single Shift 3 SS3 moves character set G3 into Gl, to
print one character.
DCS
9/0 Device Control String DCS introduces a device control string.
CSI
9/11 Control String
Introducer CSI introduces a sequence of one or
more bytes that define a control function.
ST
9/12 String Terminator ST indicates the end of a device control
string (DCS).
9/DH-9/FH <OSC>, <PM>, <APC>: See “note”
below.
27
Table 3. Equivalent 7-Bit and 8-Bit Additional Control Codes
Name 8-Bit Character
Column/Row 7-Bit Sequence
Column/Row
Index IND
8/4 ESC D
1/11 4/4
Next Line NEL
8/5 ESC E
1/11 4/5
Horizontal Tab Set HTS
8/8 ESC H
1/11 4/8
Vertical Tab Set VTS
8/10 ESC J
1/11 4/8
Partial Line Down PLD
8/11 ESC K
1/11 4/11
Partial Line-Up PLU
8/12 ESC L
1/11 4/12
Reverse Index RI
8/13 ESC M
1/11 4/14
Single Shift 2 SS2
8/14 ESC N
1/11 4/14
Single Shift 3 SS3
8/15 ESC 0
1/11 4/15
Device Control String DCS
9/0 ESC P
1/11 5/0
Control String Introducer CSI
9/11 ESC [
1/11 5/12
String Terminator ST
9/12 ESC \
1/11 5/12
28
Chapter 2 Control Code Types
8-Bit to 7-Bit Control Code Conversion
Convert 8-bit additional control codes to 7-bit escape sequences as follows:
•Insert the ESC character.
•Set the eighth bit of the final character to 0 and set its seventh bit to 1.
NOTE: Only control codes found in columns 8 and 9 of the character sets
may be converted as shown. Printable characters in columns 10
through 15 are not converted.
7-Bit to 8-Bit Control Code Conversion
Convert 7-bit escape sequences to 8-bit additional control codes as follows:
•Remove the ESC character.
•Set the eighth bit of the final character to 1 and set its seventh bit to 0.
Escape Code Sequences
The control codes discussed in the previous section are single-byte control
codes. The number of printer capabilities is greatly increased, however, by
combining character codes into escape sequences that contain two or more
bytes of information. Escape sequences always begin with the ASCII ESCape
character (location 1/11).
An ESC character in the data stream signals the printer to wait for special
instructions. The character codes following the ESC character tell the printer
what to do.
The printer in LG emulation mode recognizes three types of escape code
sequence:
•Escape Sequences (do not include variable parameters)
•Control Sequences (include variable parameters)
•Device Control Strings (include variable parameters)
Escape Sequences
NOTE: Code sequences appear in this manual with spaces inserted between
command elements. This is done for readability; do not insert spaces
between code characters when you are programming unless the
ASCII space character is part of a code sequence. For example, a
code sequence printed in this manual as
ESC [ 1 ; 4 m is
programmed as ESC[1;4m
An escape sequence uses two or more bytes to define a specific printer
control function, but does not include any variable parameters (although there
may be intermediate characters). The format for an escape sequence is:
29
After the escape sequence introducer, ESC, intermediate characters may or
may not follow in the sequence. These characters always come from the 2/0
through 2/15 (column/row) range of the Digital Multinational Character Set
(page 21). The final character signals the end of the escape sequence and
always comes from the 3/0 through 7/14 range of the Digital multinational
character set.
For example, if the intermediate character is SP (hex 20) and the final
character is G (hex 47), the resulting escape sequence is ESC SP G (hex 1B
20 47). This particular sequence tells the printer how to process data it sends
back to the host computer: send data in 7-bit form and send additional control
characters as 7-bit escape sequences.
If the characters following the ESC code are not within the defined ranges, or
if they are within the defined ranges but not recognized as a function of this
printer, the entire sequence is ignored.
Control Sequences
Control sequences begin with the control sequence introducer, CSI (9/11), in
an 8-bit data environment. They are also escape sequences, however,
because the 8-bit CSI control character can be represented by the 7-bit
escape sequence, ESC [. Control sequences may contain variable
parameters within the command sequence. The format for control sequences
is:
Parameter characters modify the action or interpretation of the command
sequence. There may be up to, but no more than, 16 parameters per
sequence. The ; (3/11) (semicolon) character is the delimiter that separates
parameters. This delimiter must be used whenever there are multiple
parameters in the control sequence.
ESC I F
1/11 2/0 - 2/15 3/0 - 7/14
Escape Sequence
Introducer Intermediate
character(s) Final character
CSI P I F ESC
9/11 3/10 to 3/15 2/0 to 2/15 3/0 to 7/14 1/11 5/11
8-Bit Control
Sequence
Introducer
Parameter
character(s) Intermediate
character(s) Final
character 7-Bit Escape
Code CSI
equivalent
30
Chapter 2 Control Code Types
Two kinds of parameters are used: numeric and selective. A numeric
parameter represents a numerical value. Numeric parameters are
represented in this manual as Pn, Pn1, Pn2
,
etc. A selective parameter
chooses an action associated with the parameter value. Selective parameters
are represented in this manual as Ps, Ps1, Ps2, etc.
Parameters are interpreted as unsigned decimal integers with the most
significant digit first. Parameter values greater than the maximum allowable
65535 will be set to 65535. Do not use a decimal point in any parameter - the
printer will ignore the entire command. If no value is specified, zero (0) is
assumed. A value of zero or an omitted parameter indicates the printer default
value should be used for that sequence.
If the printer receives the parameter characters 3AH, 3DH, or 3EH anywhere
in the parameter string, it performs no action until the final character is
received, then ignores the entire sequence. These parameter characters are
sixel control codes and must not conflict with CSI sequences.
A CSI sequence containing one or more group(s) of invalid parameters is still
processed, but only the valid parameters are used. If all parameters in a
sequence are out of range or invalid, the printer waits for the final character,
then ignores the entire sequence.
Intermediate and final characters define the control function. For example, the
sequence, ESC [ 3 m (hex 1B 5B 33 6D), turns italic printing on. This
sequence uses one selective parameter [3], no intermediate characters, and
the final character [m].
The DEC LG Emulation processes control sequences with one intermediate
character only. If more than one intermediate character is received, the printer
waits for the final character, then ignores the entire control sequence. If no
intermediate characters are in the sequence, the final character determines
the control function.
31
Device Control Strings
The format of a device control string is:
The DCS control character is the Device Control String introducer. DCS has
an 8-bit code of 9/0. This is equivalent to the escape sequence consisting of
the ESC (1/11) and P (5/0) characters. Both encodings are recognized as
DCS. After DCS is received, all characters received up to and including the
String Terminator (ST) are not printed but are stored as part of the control
string.
The protocol selector consists of parameter characters (P...P), intermediate
characters (I...I), and the final character. These characters are processed
identically to the format of a control sequence (see previous section). The
intermediate characters, if any, and the final character, specify the meaning of
the data. If present, the parameter string can further elaborate the
interpretation of the data.
If the protocol selector is parsed but not recognized, all data that follows is
ignored until it is either terminated by ST or aborted.
DCS P...P I...I F D...D F
9/0 3/0 to 3/15 2/0 to 2/15 3/0 to 7/14 9/12
8-Bit Device
Control String
Introducer
Parameter
character(s) Intermediate
character(s) Final
character Data (0 or more
characters) String
Terminator
Introducer Protocol Selector
32
Chapter 2 Special Parsing Requirements
Special Parsing Requirements
Parsing is the process of separating a programming statement into basic units
that can be translated into machine instructions. Special parsing requirements
are necessary when invalid parameters are specified, when invalid control
functions are specified, and when control characters are embedded in control
functions. Generally, the printer recovers from these conditions by performing
as much of the function as possible (or, parsing the valid parameter from the
invalid).
When control sequences are not recognized by the printer or when selective
parameters are invalid, the printer ignores them. Parameter values greater
than the specified limit are set to the maximum allowable value for that
parameter. If a C0 (7-bit) control character is received within a control
sequence, the control character is executed by the printer as if it was received
before the control sequence. Parsing then resumes. The exceptions to this
rule follow:
•When the control character is <CAN> (18 hex) or <SUB> (1A hex), the
sequence is aborted and the control character processed.
•If the control character is ESC (1B hex), the sequence is aborted and a
new sequence begins.
•If a C1 (8-bit) control character is received within an escape or control
sequence, the sequence is aborted and the C1 control character is then
processed, if it is applicable to the printer. If not, it is ignored.
•When the (A0 hex) character is received within a control sequence, it is
processed as a <Space> (20 hex) character, and parsing then resumes.
•If character (FF hex) is received within a control sequence, it is processed
as a <DEL> (7F hex) character, then parsing resumes.
•When a GR character is received during a control sequence, the eighth
bit is ignored. The remaining seven bits define a GL character.
The following messages explain error codes that might arise when using the
single shift control character:
•If a C0 or C1 control character is received after a single shift control
character <SS2> (8E hex) or <SS3> (8F hex), the control character is
processed and the single shift flag remains set. If a control sequence is
received after <SS2> (8E hex) or <SS3> (8F hex), the sequence is
processed and the single shift flag remains set.
When the characters <SP> (20 hex) or <DEL> (7F hex) are received after an
SS2orSS3,thefollowingoccurs:
•If the (94) character set resides in the set being accessed (either G2 or
G3), the <Space> or <DEL> keys are processed and the single shift flag
remains set.
•If the (94) character set resides in the set being accessed (either G2 or
G3), the printer images the corresponding character of that set (A0 hex or
FF hex), then resets the single shift flag.
•If a GR character is received after an SS2 or SS3 sequence, the eighth bit
is ignored. The single shift function then applies the remaining seven bits
to define a GL character.
33
NOTE: An error condition exists any time a GR character follows an SS2 or
SS3 sequence. The software should never send a GR character after
an SS2 or SS3 character.
If either (A0 hex) or (FF hex) are received after SS2 or SS3, the following
occurs:
•The DEC LG Emulation prints the error character (a reverse question
mark) and resets the single shift flag when a (94) character resides in the
set being accessed (either G2 or G3).
•If a (96) character resides in the set being accessed (either G2 or G3), the
printer images the corresponding character, (A0 hex) or (FF hex), of that
set, then resets the single shift flag.
34
Chapter 2 Control Code Description Format
Control Code Description Format
The rest of this chapter discusses the control codes in detail. Where
applicable, the following information is listed for each control code sequence:
Name The title or function of the control code. The LG or ASCII
mnemonic is in parentheses after the name.
ASCII CodeThe ASCII name for the control code. Escape sequences are in
7-bit (ASCII) form.
NOTE: In the code descriptions, the ASCII space character (2/0, hex 20,
decimal 32) is represented by SP.
Hex Code The code or escape sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec Code The code or escape sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
DiscussionA discussion of the uses of the sequence, and descriptions of any
exceptions or limitations to use.
35
Control Code Index
The LG emulation mode control codes listed below are grouped by related
functions.
Control code sequences in this manual are shown in 7-bit form. They can be
either 7-bit or 8-bit form, depending on your requirements. Code conversion
instructions are on page 28.
For commands that turn features on and off (set/reset, enable/disable), the
page number for the enabling command is listed. The disabling command is
on the same page.
IMPORTANT
In the index below, SP represents the ASCII space character (decimal
32, 20H). (A two-digit number followed by a subscripted capital “H” is a
hexadecimal number. Numbers without subscripts are decimal
numbers.)
FUNCTION CODE PAGE
Set/Reset Mode ESC[Psh/ESC[Psl page 40
Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM) ESC[20h page 41
Carriage Return/New Line Mode (DECCRNLM) ESC[?40h page 42
Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) ESC[?7h page 43
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) ESC[?29h page 44
Set Page Orientation (DECSPO) ESC[Ps&z page 45
Position Unit Mode (PUM) ESC[11h page 46
Force Plot Mode (DECFPM) ESC[?70h page 47
Select Size Unit (SSU) page 48
Graphic Size Selection (GSS) ESC[PnSPC page 49
Graphic Size Modification ESC[Pn1;Pn2SPB page 50
Setting Plot Density page 51
Select Graphics Density (DECSGD) ESC[Psh;Psv+{ page 52
36
Chapter 2 Control Code Index
Spacing page 54
Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI) ESC[Pn1;Pn2SPG page 55
Select Vertical (Line) Spacing (SVS) ESC[PsSPL page 57
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) ESC[Psz page 58
Select Horizontal (Character) Spacing (SHS) ESC[Psw page 59
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) ESC[Psw page 60
Vertical Format page 61
Load Vertical Format Unit (VFU) ESC[<1h page 62
End Load (VFU) ESC{<11 page 63
Channel Command ESC[pl&y page 64
Forms page 66
Loading Forms Sequence (DECLFM) DCSP1;P2&pRecordsST page 67
Form Types page 70
Start Forms Sequence (DECIFM) DCSP1&rFormNameST page 71
Terminate Forms Sequence (DECTFM) ESC[#SP1 page 72
Delete Forms Sequence (DECDFM) DCSPs& page 72
Forms Considerations page 73
Request Forms Status (DECRFMS) CSI&- page 74
Form Status Report (DECFMSR) DCS&sFormsStringST page 74
Logos page 75
Loading Logos Sequence (DECLLG) DCSP1;P2&tRecordST page 75
Select Logo Sequence (DECILG) CSIPn&} page 77
Deleting Logos Sequence (DECDLG) CSIP1;P2Pn&| page 77
Request Logo Status (DECRLGS) CSI’p page 78
Logo Status Report (DECSLGS) DCS&wLogoStringST page 78
FUNCTION CODE PAGE
37
Page Print Area and Margins page 79
Page Format Select (PFS) ESC[PsSPJ page 81
Set Lines Per Physical Page (DECSLPP) ESC[Pnt page 85
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM) ESC[Pn1;Pn2r page 86
Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM) ESC[Pn1;Pn2s page 87
Active Column and Active Line (“Cursor” Motion) page 88
Forward Index (IND) ESC D page 88
Reverse Index (RI) ESC M page 89
Next Line (NEL) ESC E page 89
Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) ESC[Pn’ page 90
Horizontal Position Relative (HPR) ESC[Pna page 90
Horizontal Position Backward (HPB) ESC[Pnj page 91
Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) ESC[Pnd page 91
Vertical Position Relative (VPR) ESC[Pne page 92
Vertical Position Backward (VPB) ESC[Pnk page 92
Cursor Up (CUU) ESC[PnA page 93
Partial Line Up (PLU) - Superscription ESC L page 93
Partial Line Down (PLD) - Subscription ESC K page 94
Tab Stops page 94
Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS) ESC [Pn;...;Pnu page 95
Horizontal Tab Stops (HTS) ESC H page 96
Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS) ESC[Pn;...;Pnv page 96
Vertical Tab Stops (VTS) ESC J page 97
Tab Clear (TBC) ESC[Psg page 97
Character Set Selection (SCS) page 98
Select Character Set Sequences page 99
Assign User Preference Supp. Set (DECAUPSS) DCS Ps !uD...DST page 101
FUNCTION CODE PAGE
38
Chapter 2 Control Code Index
Product Identification (DA) ESC[c or ESC[0c page 103
Printer Status Requests and Reports page 103
Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer
Responses page 104
Send Extended Status Report ESC[n or ESC[0n page 104
Disable Unsolicited Status Reports ESC[?1n page 104
Enable Unsol. Brief Reports and Send Ext.
Report ESC[?2n page 104
Enable Unsol. Ext. Reports and Send Ext.
Report ESC[?3n page 104
Assigning and Selecting Font Files page 108
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF) DCSPs1;Ps2}IDStringST page 109
Selecting Fonts for Printing (SGR) CSIPsm page 111
Deleting Fonts from RAM (DECLFF) DCSO;1;0yST page 112
Font Status Sequences page 112
Request Font Status (DECRFS) CSIPs;Ps”{ page 113
Font Status Report (DECFSR) DCSI”{StringST page 114
Character Attributes (SGR) ESC[Psm page 115
Character Expansion (GSM) ESC[Pn1;pn2SP B page 116
Bold Printing ESC[Psm page 118
Crossed-Out Text ESC[Psm page 119
Double-Underlined Text ESC[Psm page 120
Italic Printing ESC[Psm page 120
Overlined Text ESC[Psm page 121
Turn Off All Attributes ESC[0m page 121
Underlined Text ESC[Psm page 122
Justification (JFY) ESC[PsSPF page 123
FUNCTION CODE PAGE
39
Sixel Graphics Processing page 125
Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode ESC[Psm page 129
Drawing Vectors (DECVEC) ESC[Pn1;Pn2;Pn3;Pn4;Pn5;!| page 136
Block Characters page 137
Setting Block Character Parameters (DECBCS) ESC[P1;P2;...P5’r page 137
Start Block Character Mode (DECBLOCKC) ESC%SP1 page 139
Stop Block Character Mode ESC%@ page 139
Printer Reset
Reset to Initial State (RIS) ESC c page 140
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) ESC[!p page 140
Selecting and Returning from LinePrinter Plus
Emulations
Select LinePrinter Plus Emulations via
(DECIPEM) page 141
Select LinePrinter Plus Emulations via (SOCS) page 142
7-Bit and 8-Bit Transmission and Interpretations page 143
Draft Mode Printing
Enter Draft Mode ESC%/3 page 144
Exit Draft Mode ESC%@ page 144
Default Values and States page 145
Bar Codes Chapter
4
FUNCTION CODE PAGE
40
Chapter 2 Set/Reset Mode
Set/Reset Mode
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC [ Ps h ESC [ Ps l
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 68 1B 5B Ps 6C
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 104 27 91 Ps 108
Purpose Turns basic printing features on (set) or off (reset).
DiscussionSet/Reset Mode controls certain printer features that have two
settings: on or off. One sequence may be used to turn
several features on or off. Parameter values Ps determine
different printer modes.
Parameter values are either ANSI or LG private. All
parameters in a given sequence must be of the same type.
LG private parameters are preceded by the question mark
(“?”) character.
On Set/Reset features, default settings go into effect when
the printer is powered-up or a reset (RIS or DECSTR)
sequence is sent.
Table 4. Set/Reset Mode Parameter Values
Ps
(Parameter Values) Printer Mode Page No.
ANSI
11 Position Unit Mode (PUM) page 46
20 Line feed/New line Mode (LNM) page 41
DEC Private
?7 Autowrap Mode (DECAWM) page 43
?29 Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) page 44
?40 Carriage Return/New Line
Mode (DECCRNLM) page 42
?70 Force Plot Mode (DECFPM) page 47
41
Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM)
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC [ 2 0 h ESC [ 2 0 l
Hex Code 1B 5B 32 30 68 1B 5B 32 30 6C
Dec Code 27 91 50 48 104 27 91 50 48 108
Purpose Defines the paper position according to how the line feed features
are enabled.
DiscussionAdvance the paper up one line by pressing the line feed key
once. A half-second pause ensues, then the paper will feed
one line. To feed paper continuously, hold down the line feed
key. After a half-second pause, the paper feeds up one line in
3-hertz intervals.
To enable further line feed features, (i.e., microstepping),
raise the printer cover and locate the control panel on the left
side. Four keys-UP, NEXT, DOWN, and PREV-control
additional line feed capabilities:
To move the paper up 1/600 inch, press the LINE FEED key
and the NEXT key together. For continuous forward paper
feed at 1/600 inch, hold down the LINE FEED key and the
NEXT key; the paper will feed at 3-hertz intervals after a half-
second pause.
Whether Line Feed/New Line mode is enabled or disabled, a
Carriage Return <CR> control code is interpreted according
to the DECCRNLM mode in use. (See “Carriage Return/New
Line Mode,” page 42.)
LNM remains as selected from the last power-on session.
Factory default is LNM reset.
42
Chapter 2 Carriage Return/New Line Mode (DECCRNLM)
Carriage Return/New Line Mode (DECCRNLM)
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC[?40h ESC[?40l
Hex Code 1B 5B 3F 34 30 68 1B 5B 3F 34 30 6C
Dec Code 27 91 63 52 48 104 27 91 63 52 48 108
Purpose Defines printer response to the Carriage Return (CR)
character.
Discussion When the printer receives the CR character with Carriage
Return/New Line Mode enabled (set), it returns the active
column to the left margin and advances paper one line.
When the printer receives the CR character with Carriage
Return/New Line Mode disabled (reset), it returns the active
column to the left margin without advancing the active line.
LNM remains as selected from the last power-on session.
The factory default is LNM reset.
43
Autowrap Mode (DECAWM)
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC[?7h ESC[?7l
Hex Code 1B 5B 3F 37 68 1B 5B 3F 37 6C
Dec Code 27 91 63 55 104 27 91 63 55 108
Purpose Determines what happens when text exceeds the right margin of
the page.
DiscussionWhen autowrap is enabled (set) and text runs past the right
margin, the active position moves to the left margin on the
nextline,andnodataarelost.
When autowrap is disabled (reset) and text runs past the right
margin, the data are lost.
DECAWM remains as selected from the last power-on
session. Factory default is DECAWM reset.
44
Chapter 2 Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM)
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM)
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC[?29h ESC[?29l
Hex Code 1B 5B 3F 32 39 68 1B 5B 3F 32 39 6C
Dec Code 27 91 63 50 57 104 27 91 63 50 57 108
Purpose Controls the Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) sequence.
DiscussionWhen Pitch Select Mode is enabled (set), the current font
determines the horizontal pitch.
When Pitch Select Mode is disabled (reset), the printer uses
the horizontal pitch selected by the Set Horizontal Pitch
(DECSHORP) sequence.
The power-up default is DECPSM reset. DECPSM is
overridden by an SPI command (page 55) or an SHS
command (page 59).
45
Set Page Orientation (DECSPO)
ASCII Code ESC[Ps&z
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 26 7A
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 38 122
Purpose Sets the intended reading orientation of the page with respect to
the paper feed direction.
DiscussionDECSPO is similar to the page orientation defined by PFS, but
has no effect on the page size or number of lines and
columns. All page related functions are interpreted in relation
to page orientation (margins, line and character spacing).
The default value is Ps=0
.
The selective parameters indicate the following:
Ps Function
0 Portrait: Page orientation is in line
with the paper feed direction
1 Landscape: Page orientation is
perpendicular to the paper feed
direction.
46
Chapter 2 Position Unit Mode (PUM)
Position Unit Mode (PUM)
Set (Enable) Reset (Disable)
ASCII Code ESC[11h ESC[11l
Hex Code 1B 5B 31 31 68 1B 5B 31 31 6C
Dec Code 27 91 49 49 104 27 91 49 49 108
Purpose Selects a unit of measurement used with the escape sequences
that control spacing parameters.
DiscussionWhen Position Unit mode is enabled (set), it selects either
decipoints or pixels, depending on the setting of the Select
Size Unit (SSU) sequence.
When Position Unit mode is disabled (reset), it selects a
spacing unit equal to one character position called a
character cell. The width and height of the cell is equal to the
currently selected horizontal and vertical spacing increment.
Power-up default is PUM reset.
Table 5 lists the escape sequences affected by the PUM and
SSU settings.
Table 5. Escape Sequences With Spacing Parameters
Sequence Name DEC Mnemonic Page No.
Spacing Pitch Increment * SPI* page 55
Set Lines Per Physical Page DECSLPP page 85
Set Top and Bottom Margins DECSTBM page 86
Set Left and Right Margins DECSLRM page 87
Horizontal Position Absolute HPA page 90
Horizontal Position Relative HPR page 90
Horizontal Position Backward HPB page 91
Vertical Position Absolute VPA page 91
Vertical Position Relative VPR page 92
Vertical Position Backward VPB page 92
Set Horizontal Tab Stops DECSHTS page 95
Set Vertical Tab Stops DECSVTS page 96
Drawing Vectors* DECVEC* page 136
Select Barcode Parameters DECSBCA page 203
* Not affected by PUM setting.
47
Force Plot Mode (DECFPM)
Reset (Disable) Set (Enable)
ASCII Code ESC[?70l ESC[?70h
Hex Code 1B 5B 3F 37 30 6C 1B 5B 3F 37 30 68
Dec Code 27 91 63 55 48 108 27 91 63 55 48 104
Purpose Forces the printer to enter or stay in Plotting mode.
DiscussionThe printer normally operates in Printing mode (the default) to
achieve maximum throughput of standard fonts and spacing.
Plotting mode sacrifices speed but offers greater flexibility,
such as special fonts, font sizes, and character spacing.
Many of these features are available in print mode when the
Print Mode option is set to Enable with the control panel.
Force Plot mode prevents accidental shifting between the
printed and plotted fonts, and can reduce unnecessary paper
shift. The default for DECFPM = reset state.
For further information about plot mode, see overview
description on page 18.
48
Chapter 2 Select Size Unit (SSU)
Select Size Unit (SSU)
ASCII Code ESC[PsSPI
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 20 49
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 32 73
Purpose Works with the Position Unit Mode (PUM) sequence to select a
unit of measurement for spacing parameters.
DiscussionWhen PUM is enabled (set), Select Size Unit selects either
decipoints or pixels as the spacing unit, depending on the
parameter settings shown below.
If the printer receives an SSU while PUM is disabled (reset),
the selected unit will take effect when PUM is set and will
then remain in effect until the printer receives either another
SSU or a reset sequence. Default value at power-up or reset
is decipoints. The printer will ignore all Ps values other than 2
or 7.
The printer converts decipoints (D) into pixel (P) values by
using the formula shown below and rounding off the result to
the nearest integer:
All arithmetic operations are performed using integer
instructions. For example, the formula above converts
decipoints to the nearest pixel.
NOTE:If you select decipoint units, do not use horizontal
position relative (HPR) and vertical position relative
(VPR) sequences. Using these commands with
decipoint units produces cumulative positioning
errors because they are rounded-off.
NOTE:The JIS Katakana character set is only available in the
10 CPI font size. The GSS and SSU control codes
can only be used with these character sets if 10
CPI is specified.
Ps Spacing Unit
2 Decipoint (1/720 inch)
7 Pixel (1/600 inch)
Dx5
6
P=
49
Graphic Size Selection (GSS)
ASCII Code ESC[PnSPC
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 20 43
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 32 67
Purpose Sets the height and width of all characters in the selected font
that start after the control sequence.
DiscussionPn is a decimal value that species the height of the font in units
determined by the Select Size Unit (SSU) sequence. The
width of the font is implicitly defined by the height. For
example, the width of a 10-point font is 10 pitch. The initial
value for Pn is Pn = 100.
If the desired font height cannot be matched exactly, the next
smallest available font is selected. The GSS sequence
remains in effect until the printer receives another GSS
sequence or a Graphic Size Modification (GSM) sequence.
NOTE:The JIS Katakana character set is only available in the
10 CPI font size. The GSS and SSU control codes
can only be used with these character sets if 10 CPI
is specified.
50
Chapter 2 Graphic Size Modification (GSM)
GraphicSizeModification(GSM)
ASCII Code ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 SP B
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 20 42
Dec Code 27 91 Pn1 59 Pn2 32 66
Purpose Modifies the height and width for all designated fonts as set by
the GSS sequence.
DiscussionPn1 is a decimal value that specifies the height of the font as a
percentage of the height set by the GSS sequence. Pn2 is a
decimal value that specifies the width as a percentage of the
width set by the GSS sequence. Data processing fonts can
be modified by two or three times their default height and two
times their default width.
GSM affects only the current print or plot mode. In Print
mode, GSM always changes the current pitch according to
the newly selected font. In Plot mode, the pitch is changed
only if Pitch Select mode is set.
The GSM sequence is effective until the printer receives
another GSM or GSS sequence.
NOTE:The GSM command will only work if the base font is
DP 10. See the DECATFF command.
51
Setting Plot Density
The printer can plot in several different densities (dots per inch, or dpi), from
30 dpi to 200 dpi.
The Plot mode fonts contain the information for the vertical and horizontal
densities they use. Determine non-text imaging densities (for sixels, bar
codes) by using these innate commands. Default values for both the vertical
and horizontal densities for graphic work are 100.
While density changes can occur anywhere on a page, they can also cause
vertical negative paper motion while printing. Judicious planning minimizes
this effect.
Plot speed is adversely affected by changes in density: the higher the density,
the slower the speed. Hence, plotting in 50 x 50 density is four times faster
than plotting in 100 x 100. If speed is a consideration, select lower density
plotting. The lowest density plot font available is the 60 x 75 density.
52
Chapter 2 Set Graphics Density (DECSGD)
Set Graphics Density (DECSGD)
ASCII Code ESC[Psh;Psv&{
Hex Code 1B 5B Psh 3B Psv 26 7B
Dec Code 27 91 Psh 59 Psv 38 123
Purpose Sets the darkness of drawn images.
DiscussionDECSGD controls darkness via the density of the physical pixels.
It does not change the resolution of the image (logical pixels),
only the darkness of the segments drawn.
NOTE:Psh and Psv do not affect the density of plotted text.
Text density comes from the current font.
DECSGD sets the density for graphics (sixels, logos, vectors,
block characters, and bar codes). The selective parameters,
Psh and Psv, designate the horizontal and vertical dot
densities used for plotting graphics.
•Psh Parameter (Psh) selects the horizontal dot density.
•Psv Parameter (Psv) selects the vertical dot density.
The actions of Psh and Psv are dependent on the print
orientation because x-direction print densities differ
significantly from y-direction print densities. (This is the only
printer instruction that is directly dependent on the current
orientation setting.) Table 6 defines how orientation is
designated by Psh and Psv.
Use Table 7 and Table 8 with Table 6 to establish the exact
orientations designated by Psh and Psv.
Table 6. Psh and Psv Orientation
Direction Portrait (Default) Landscape
horizontal (Psh) same as x same as y
vertical (Psv) same as y same as x
x-density same as horizontal same as vertical
y-density same as vertical same as horizontal
53
Table 7. X-Density Values
Table 8.Y-Density Values
Psh
(Portrait-dflt) X-Density
(Dots/Inch)
0 No change
150
260
370
480
590
6 100 (default)
7110
8 120
9 130
10 140
11 150
12 200
Psv
(Portrait-dflt) Y-Density
(Dots/Inch)
0 No change
130
240
350
460
5 66.67
675
786
8 100 (default)
9 120
10 150
11 200
54
Chapter 2 Spacing
Spacing
The five spacing sequences covered in this section affect the spacing of lines
and characters. Horizontal pitch affects character spacing in characters per
inch (CPI). Vertical pitch affects line spacing in lines per inch (lpi).
DECSHORP and SHS affect character size in addition to spacing if Print
Mode is set to Enable with the control panel.
Horizontal and vertical pitch values can be changed by using the Select
Horizontal Spacing (SHS) and Select Vertical Spacing (SVS) sequences or
the Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI) sequence. These sequences can accept
two spacing units: decipoints or pixels. To select the unit of measurement,
use the Position Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences.
Alternatively, you can use Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) and Set Vertical
Pitch (DECVERP) sequences to alter spacing.
Except for DECSHORP, all spacing commands are acted upon as soon as
they are received, and the new spacing increments take effect immediately.
Table 9. Line and Character Spacing Sequences
Sequence Name DEC Mnemonic Page No.
Spacing Pitch Increment SPI page 55
Select Vertical Spacing SVS page 57
Set Vertical Pitch DECVERP page 58
Select Horizontal Spacing SHS page 59
Set Horizontal Pitch DECSHORP page 60
55
Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI)
ASCII Code ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 SP G
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 20 47
Dec Code 27 91 Pn1 59 Pn2 32 71
Purpose Sets the vertical and horizontal spacing increments for all
characters that follow in the data stream. You can select one
or both increments with a single Spacing Pitch Increment
sequence. The SPI sequence gives you the greatest flexibility
in adjusting white space (pitch) between characters and lines.
DiscussionThis command sequence uses decipoints or pixels as units.
Select the unit with the Select Size Unit (SSU) sequence.
Spacing Pitch Increment is not affected by the Position Unit
Mode (PUM) sequence or by the page orientation. For
example, if you set a vertical increment of 100 pixels (or 1/6
inch), the printer uses this setting for both portrait and
landscaped pages.
Pn1 selects the vertical spacing increment. Pn2 selects the
horizontal spacing increment. Parameters must be positive
integers. If you use a decimal point, the printer will ignore the
command. Printer default values are Pn1 =0andPn2 =0,
which selects the spacing of the current font.
You can change the SPI setting for horizontal spacing in
three ways:
•Use another SPI sequence.
•Use a Select Horizontal Spacing (SHS) sequence.
•Use a combination of the Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) and
Select Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) sequences. Most
combinations are acceptable for this function.
You can change the SPI setting for vertical spacing in two
ways:
•Use a Set Vertical Spacing (SVS) sequence.
•Use a Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) sequence.
NOTE:If Pn1 or Pn2 is 0 (or omitted), the printer defaults to
the font file pitch setting.
If you set the Print Mode option to Enable with the
control panel, this command will not force the printer
into plot mode. The current print font will be used and
throughput will be at its maximum.
If the Print Mode option is set to Disable, this
command forces the printer into plot mode.
56
Chapter 2 Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI)
If a position command does not precede the printable (graphic)
character, the printer will place that character to the right of the
previously received character.
The distance between characters depends on the values of Pn1
and Pn2 in the most recent SPI, SHS, or DECSHORP sequence.
If you set the Pn1 or Pn2 values to 0, or if you do not send an SPI
sequence, the printer uses the default horizontal and vertical
spacing for the font currently in use.
Horizontal spacing is the same for all font styles.
57
Select Vertical (Line) Spacing (SVS)
ASCII Code ESC[PsSPL
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 20 4C
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 32 76
Purpose Selects the vertical spacing (pitch) between lines that is used by
all fonts.
DiscussionPs selects the vertical pitch and vertical character position unit.
SVS does not affect the vertical size of the selected font.
Ps Vertical Pitch Vertical Character
Positioning Unit
0 6 lines per inch 1/6 inch (default)
1 4 lines per inch 1/4 inch
2 3 lines per inch 1/3 inch
3 12 lines per inch 1/12 inch
4 8 lines per inch 1/8 inch
5 5 lines per inch 1/5 inch
9 2 lines per inch 1/2 inch
10 10 lines per inch 1/10 inch
58
Chapter 2 Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP)
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP)
ASCII Code ESC[Psz
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 7A
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 122
Purpose Selects the number of lines printed per inch on the page.
DiscussionSelects the line spacing (vertical pitch) used with all fonts.
Ps selects the vertical pitch (lines per inch).
Changing vertical pitch to 8 lpi or 10 lpi alters the physical
size of the form, since form length is specified in terms of
lines per page.
Vertical tab stops are not affected by changes to vertical
pitch. For example, a vertical tab at line 15 remains set even
ifyouchangeverticalpitchfrom6lpito10lpi.
Ps Vertical Pitch
0 6 lines per inch (current default)
2 8 lines per inch
7 10 lines per inch (This setting is accomplished by
reversing the paper.)
59
Select Horizontal (Character) Spacing (SHS)
ASCII Code ESC[PsSPK
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 20 4B
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 32 75
Purpose Selects character spacing (horizontal pitch).
DiscussionPs selects the horizontal pitch and the horizontal character
position unit. If Print Mode is set to Enable from the control
panel, Ps will change the character size with respect to the
selected pitch. If set to Disable, only the white space between
characters varies.
NOTE: If the Print Mode option is set to Disable with the
control panel, the SHS command can force the
printer into plot mode. If the page contains a dense
concentration of text (many text lines and many
characters per line), the SHS command will cause
the DEC LG Emulation to pause a few seconds
between pages.
To ensure faster text printing, select an appropriate
font and character size setting with DECATFF, SGR
instead of SHS. If the Print Mode is set to Enable
with the control panel, this command will not force
the printer into plot mode and there should be no
pause between pages.
Ps Horizontal Pitch Horizontal Character
Position Unit
0 10 characters per inch 1/10 inch
1 12 characters per inch 1/12 inch
2 15 characters per inch 1/15 inch
3 6 characters per inch 1/6 inch
60
Chapter 2 Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP)
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP)
ASCII Code ESC[Psw
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 77
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 119
Purpose Selects the character spacing for monospaced fonts. This
sequence selects the number of characters printed per
horizontal inch on a line. If the Print Mode option is set to
Enable with the control panel, the character size will change
to match the selected pitch. If Print Mode is set to Disable,
only the white space between the characters varies and can
force the printer into plot mode.
DiscussionPitch Select Mode (DECPSM) activates the Set Horizontal Pitch
(DECSHORP) sequence. When DECPSM is set (enabled),
the printer uses the horizontal pitch of the current font. When
DECPSM is reset (disabled), the printer uses the horizontal
pitch selected by the last DECSHORP sequence.
In addition to changing the character size and/or the white
space around characters, this sequence enacts the following:
•Resets the left and right margins to the printable limits.
•Resets the line home and line end positions to the printable
limits. (Refer to the Page Format Select [PFS] sequence
on page 81.)
•The current horizontal tabs remain as set.
•Can force the printer into plot mode when Print Mode is set
to Disable with the control panel.
Ps selects the horizontal pitch (characters per inch).
Ps Horizontal Pitch (cpi)
0 Current font pitch
1 10 characters per inch
2 12 characters per inch
3 13.3 characters per inch
4 16.7 characters per inch
5 5 characters per inch (normal width characters)
6 6 characters per inch
8 8.25 characters per inch
9 15 characters per inch
61
Vertical Format
Vertical format consists of two control codes that program the printer to make
fast vertical paper movements (slewing) during print jobs. Vertical formatting
increases printer efficiency and reduces printing time for repetitive printing
jobs.
Vertical channels in the form are defined by downloading the Vertical Format
Unit (VFU) from the host to the printer. Subsequent data is then printed on the
form at the specified channel. These functions are achieved by using control
sequences.
Two control sequences, Load VFU and End VFU, are used to enact the VFU
load procedure. Besides loading the VFU, top-of-form is also defined. Top-of-
form is determined by the actual paper position when the load VFU command
is sent to the printer; therefore, be sure to align the paper at the desired top-
of-form
before sending the LOAD VFU command.
An example showing several VFU commands and the resulting output is
provided on page 294.
NOTE: In addition to using VFU commands, you may also ensure faster text
printing by selecting an appropriate font and character size setting
with DECATFF, SGR instead of the SHS command. The SHS
command can force the printer into plot mode. If the page contains a
dense concentration of text (many text lines and many characters per
line), the SHS command will cause the DEC LG Emulationto pause a
few seconds between pages.
62
Chapter 2 Load Vertical Format Unit (VFU)
Load Vertical Format Unit (VFU)
ASCII Code ESC[<1h
Hex Code 1B 5B 3C 31 68
Dec Code 27 91 60 49 104
Purpose Downloads the VFU from the host to the printer.
DiscussionAll data following the begin load sequence is placed in VFU
memory except ASCII control codes. Any command entered
during load VFU is ignored except the End Load sequence.
All data must be in the VFU load format. If an error occurs
during the load, the load is cancelled. If a load overruns the
maximum forms length, the load is cancelled and any
remaining VFU data is printed. Cancelled loads default to the
current form length setting (as set from the control panel or
with the DECSLPP escape sequence).
VFU load format consists of 2 bytes (one byte pair) for each
line on the page. The structure of each byte follows:
The variables in the two bytes are defined as follows:
C1 - C12 represent channels 1 through 12 with binary 1s and
0s.
C1 identifies the top-of-form (TOF).
C12 identifies the bottom-of-form (BOF).
Bit 7 for each byte is not used. Bit 6 for each byte is always 1.
NOTE:An example showing several VFU commands and the
resulting output is provided on page 294.
Table 10. Byte 1 Structure (First Character of Pair)
Bits:7 654321 0
Value: X 1 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
Table 11. Byte 2 Structure (Second Character of Pair)
Bits:7 654321 0
Value: X 1 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7
63
End Load (VFU)
ASCII Code ESC[<1l
Hex Code 1B 5B 3C 31 6C
Dec Code 27 91 60 49 108
Purpose Ends the Vertical Format Unit load.
DiscussionWhen all VFUs are loaded, enact End Load VFU and the form
length set is complete.
NOTE:Load VFU is a long control string format. Make sure
thatyoudonotsendaCR,LF,orCR+LFinthe
middle of the VFU data. To avoid having to send a
Carriage Return (CR) while entering the Load VFU
command, you may wish to set a wide command line
for your terminal device.
For example: for VMS, you may increase the
command line width for the terminal device used to
communicate with the printer to 132 characters, via
the command $set term/width=132.
An example showing several VFU commands and
the resulting output is provided on page 294.
64
Chapter 2 Channel Command
Channel Command
ASCII Code ESC[p1&y
Hex Code 1B 5B p1 26 79
Dec Code 27 91 p1 38 121
Purpose The channel commands control paper motion.
P1 consists of three digits: nnn. When the first n equals 9,
reverse paper motion occurs. If the first n equals any value
other than 0 or 9, the entire sequence is ignored. Table 12
gives the values of nnn for each channel.
Table 12. Channel Values
p1
nnn Move Forward
to Channel nnn Move Backward
to Channel
000 1 900 1
001 2 901
002 3 902
003 4 903
004 5 904
005 6 905
006 7 906
007 8 907
008 9 908
009 10 909
010 11 910
011 12 911
* Selecting any other channel than those in this table
results in a default to channel 12.
65
Beware of the following conditions when the selected channel is in the
forward direction:
•If you try to print text at a channel not previously defined, the text prints at
channel 12 (BOF).
•If you try to print text at a channel not previously defined and channel 12
is also undefined, text prints at the next line.
•If a VFU table is not loaded and channel commands are sent to it, a line
feed occurs then the text prints.
•IfyouloadaVFUtablewithmorethanoneTOFand/ormorethanone
BOF already defined, the load is terminated and a warning message
is displayed on the front panel.
Beware of the following conditions when the selected channel is in the
reverse direction:
•If you try to print text at a channel not previously defined, a reverse line
feed occurs then the text prints.
•If you try to print text at a channel not previously defined and channel 12
is also undefined, a reverse line feed occurs then the text prints.
•If a VFU table is not loaded and channel commands are sent to it, a
reverse line feed occurs then the text prints.
•IfyouloadaVFUtablewithmorethanoneTOFand/ormorethanone
BOF already defined, the load is terminated and an error code is
displayed on the front panel.
66
Chapter 2 Forms
Forms
A form contains data. This data is a sequence of self-contained commands
and text that can occupy one or more pages of the form. The data form can be
downloaded then stored in printer memory for later use. The status report lists
the form IDs loaded in the printer.
Once a form is downloaded, it is selectable. Stored data is merged with the
fill-in data stream, and the merged data is printed as a completed form. When
selected, the printed form can be printed repeatedly with different sets of fill-in
data.
Fill-in data is a sequence of commands and text, usually variable and not
repeated data, used to fill in the empty fields of a form. Each fill-in data field is
terminated with a switch character, as explained in the following section. The
fill-in data for the last field of a page must terminate with a switch character
unless it is the last page of a form. In this case, use the Terminate Form
sequence.
Forms and fill-in data conform to the following :
•Forms cannot be nested.
•Up to 32 forms can be loaded into the printer, subject to available
memory.
•Form size must not exceed 64K bytes.
•Each form page must terminate with FF (0/12) and have at least one field.
•Do not use a form-feed character for fill-in data.
The following sections describe how to load a form into memory, select the
form for printing, terminate form generation, and delete the form from storage.
Appendix D provides an example of commands and output for generating a
form, starting on page 289.
67
Loading Forms Sequence (DECLFM)
ASCII Code DCS P1 ; P2 & p RECORD ST
Hex Code 90 P1 3B P2 26 70 RECORD 9C
Dec Code 144 P1 59 P2 38 112 RECORD 156
Purpose Allows you to load forms into printer memory.
DiscussionThe Pn parameters define the format of the form as well as which
forms to delete. Forms can be loaded at any time except
during another download operation, or while a form is
printing. Once loaded, forms are selectable until:
•New forms are loaded with the P2 = 3 (replace all forms)
command
•Another form with the same number is loaded (replacing the
old form)
•System power is turned off (all loaded forms are lost)
P1 and P2 can be defined as follows:
•P1 is the form file indicator that specifies the form file format
used in the command string. The value must be 0 and the
file must be in the form file format, otherwise the entire
load form sequence is ignored.
•P2 defines the replacement action: which forms to delete
before the new form is loaded. If you choose to replace
all forms, note that the forms are deleted even if the new
form is not successfully loaded.
The form record includes a form header that defines form
parameters and size, and the form data string. It is
constructed as follows:
P1 Function
0 DEC LG-series printer form file
format
Other Sequence is ignored
P2 Function
0/Missing Replace the named form
3 Replace all forms
68
Chapter 2 Loading Forms Sequence (DECLFM)
•<ID length><Form ID><CNTL encoding character>
•<Form data switch character><Form length>
•<Form data string>
These form record fields are described in detail below:
•ID length is a two-digit number (01 - 99) that defines the length
of the form ID.
•Form ID is a string of 1 - 99 printable characters. IDs exceeding
10 characters are truncated.
•TheCNTLencodingcharacter
The CNTL encoding character indicates the start of control-
character encoding. The character is always in the 2/0 through 7/
14 range and is followed by a two-digit hexadecimal number
equivalent to the ASCII value of the control character to be
encoded.
Every control character must be entered in its hexadecimal
format and preceded by the control character. Do not embed a
control character (0/0 through 1/15) in the form string. The
following control characters and their hexadecimal values are
allowable:
All printable characters (except control characters) are encoded
in the same manner. For example, to embed the control
sequence: ESC [ 100 `, (CSI 100 `) into the form, replace ESC
with the control-character encoding character (^) and the
hexadecimal value for ESC (1B). The form's sequence is
^1B[100`.
Control Char. Hex Code Control
Char. Hex Code
BEL 07 ESC 1B
BS 08 IND 84
HT 09 NEL 85
LF 0A HTS 86
VT 0B VTS 87
FF 0C PLD 8A
CR 0D PLU 8B
SO 0E RI 8C
SI 0F SS2 8E
CAN 18 SS3 8F
SUB 1A CSI 9B
69
•Form Data Switch Character designates the insertion of the
form's fill-in data. The character, considered a field indicator
character, is always in a range from 2/0 through 7/14. The
form-data switch character must be different from the control-
character encoding character. The form data switch
character is not printable within the form and should not be
used in any control sequence in the form.
•Form length is a five-digit number (00001 through 65,535) that
defines the length of the string to follow. The string count
includes all characters other than uncoded control characters
(0/0 through 1/15).
•Form Data String is the constant portion of the form: the data.
Form data is a string of text and command sequences with
encoded control characters. Terminate the string with an ST
command. Uncoded control characters (other than ESC), act
as formatting characters for editors. Though you can embed
them in the form data string, they are not part of the form.
For more information, refer to Appendix D.
70
Chapter 2 Form Types
Form Types
A form can be printed in Print mode, in Plot mode, or in a combination of Print
and Plot mode.
•In Plot mode, all positioning should be fully specified by the LG
positioning commands. The entire form is plotted if the following
conditions exist:
Contains any graphics (block characters, bar codes, vectors, logos)
The pitch of the font does not exist in print mode
The form uses justified text
•In Print mode, all positioning is controlled by the CR, LF, and tabs control
characters. The entire form is printed if:
It contains justified text and no font changes occur within a line
It does not violate any other conditions of Print mode
71
Start Forms Sequence (DECIFM)
ASCII Code DCS P1 & r FORM NAME ST
Hex Code 90 P1 26 72 FORM NAME 9C
Dec Code 144 P1 38 114 FORM NAME 156
Purpose Selects any form loaded in RAM.
DiscussionP1 is the Select Form Switch character. With this sequence, a
form loaded in RAM is selectable for printing. When you
select the form, the printer enters Form mode. The variable
fill-in data is merged and printed with the form data. When the
printer encounters an FF character in the form data portion of
a multiple page form, it advances to the next page and
continues merging with the fill-in data that follows. If there is
more than one set of fill-in data, the same form constant data
is merged with the new fill-in data to create additional forms.
The select form switch character always ranges from 2/0
through 7/14 decimal and designates the print source to
switch back to form data (to the character after the form data
switch character). The character does not have to be the
same as the form data switch character; however, it is not
printable within the fill-in data string.
The form name is the first ten characters of the loaded form's
ID (or the full form ID if it is ten characters or less in length). If
no such form exists, an error message displays and the fill-in
data is printed as text data.
Note that the text and command strings corresponding to the
last field of a multi-page form page must terminate with a
switch character. However, the last field in the last page of a
form must terminate with the Stop Form sequence and not
with the switch character. To exit Form mode, enter a
Terminate sequence.
Many special conditions might affect the printer output or
performance in its various uses. See “Forms Considerations,”
page 73, for further information regarding these conditions.
72
Chapter 2 Terminate Forms Sequence (DECTFM)
Terminate Forms Sequence (DECTFM)
ASCII Code ESC#SP1
Hex Code 1B 23 20 31
Dec Code 27 35 32 49
Purpose Terminates the printing of a form.
DiscussionIf no form is selected, this sequence is ignored.
Many special conditions might affect the printer output or
performance in its various uses. See “Forms Considerations”
on page 73 for further information regarding these conditions.
Delete Forms Sequence (DECDFM)
ASCII Code DCSPs&qFORMSIDST
Hex Code 90 Ps 26 71 FORMS ID 9C
Dec Code 144 Ps 38 113 FORMS ID 156
Purpose Deletes forms from printer memory.
DiscussionPs selects the forms to be deleted. The Form ID string identifies
the forms to be deleted. If more than one Form ID is listed,
separate them with colons. Form IDs with more than ten
characters are ignored.
If you try to delete forms, logos, or fonts while they are
printing, the printer will ignore the delete command.
Many special conditions might affect the printer output or
performance in its various uses. See “Forms Considerations”
on page 73 for further information regarding these conditions.
Ps Function
0 Delete forms with the same name
3 Delete all stored forms
73
Forms Considerations
The following commands are not to be included in form data or fill-in data:
•Load a form, logo, or font
•Delete a form, logo, or font
•Invoke a LG sequence
•Invokes an ESCc (RIS) sequence. This will exit you from the Form mode.
Be aware of the following conditions, which can affect the printer's output/
performance in Forms mode:
•To minimize paper movement, print all text together and print all graphics
together. Most importantly, print all of the same density material together.
•Encoded Escape sequences cannot start in the form and continue in the
fill-in data, nor can the reverse occur.
•Changes made to the font, cursor position, density, or mode are not
restored after you terminate a Form sequence.
•Block characters used in a form must begin and end on the same page.
Form data switch characters and select form sequence switch characters
are not printable as block characters unless they are encoded.
•Since mode settings, fonts, and spacing parameters can be changed
between the time the form is loaded and the item is selected, the
environment of the form (PUM or SSU) should be established in the form
data.
•If ESC, CAN, or SUB is embedded in the form string, it will terminate form
loading and the form will be discarded. Encoding DCS, RIS, CAN, or SUB
in a form string will also stop form loading.
•If the form length in the header does not agree with the length of the form
string received, the form is discarded.
•If the form is not terminated by a form feed (0/12), and does not contain at
least one form-switch character, a form-switch character and an 0/12 are
added at the end of the form.
•In general, the number of switch characters in the form data should be
one more than the number of switch characters in the fill-in data.
When using bar codes, note the following:
•When using bar codes as part of the form data, make sure that the control
character encoding character in the bar code differs from the control
character encoding character and the switch character in the Loading
Form sequence.
•When using bar codes as part of the fill-in data, make sure that the control
character encoding character of the bar code differs from the switch
character in the Select Form sequence.
•Bar codes must start and end on the same page of a form.
74
Chapter 2 Request Forms Status (DECFMSR)
Request Forms Status (DECFMSR)
ASCII Code CSI&~
Hex Code 9B 26 7E
Dec Code 155 38 126
Purpose Requests a status report of the forms available for printing.
DiscussionInvoke this request if you need to know what forms are available
for printing.
Form Status Report (DECRFMS)
ASCII Code DCS & s FORM STRING ST
Hex Code 90 26 73 FORM STRING 9C
Dec Code 144 38 115 FORM STRING 156
Purpose Printer response to a DECFMSR sequence.
DiscussionThe status string contains a list of all valid forms loaded in the
printer. Each form name starts on a new line and is separated
by commas.
75
Logos
A logo is a graphic image stored in the printer. Once a logo is downloaded, it
can be printed repeatedly by referring to its identifying number. Up to 16 logos
can reside in the printer, with a maximum size of 65,535 bytes per logo. The
following subsections explain various ways in which to utilize the logo feature.
For an example of commands and output for creating a logo, see page D-6.
Loading Logos Sequence (DECLLG)
ASCII Code DCS P1 ; P2 & t RECORD ST
Hex Code 90 P1 3B P2 26 74 RECORD 9C
Dec Code 144 P1 59 P2 38 116 RECORD 156
Purpose Loads logos into printer memory.
DiscussionPn parameters select the format and the logos to be deleted
before loading this logo.
•P1 specifies the logo file indicator that chooses the logo file
format used in the command string. The indicator number
must be 0 and the file must be in the DEC LG-series
printer logo file format. If not, the entire load logo set is
ignored. Default: P1 = 0.
•P2 lists the logos to be deleted.
Logos can be loaded at any time except during another
download operation and during a form printing operation.
When loaded, they are available for selection until:
•A logo with the same number is loaded (the new logo,
though the same number, will replace the old).
•System power is turned off (all loaded logos are lost).
The logo record includes all data after the final character (t)
and up to the string terminator, as well as the logo header
portion and the row data strings portion. The logo header
contents identify the logo and the size (number of characters)
of the row data string. The logo record variables include:
•ID Length is a one digit number (1 through 4) that defines
the length of the logo ID.
P2 Function
0 Delete all logos
Others Delete any logo with the same Logo ID as this
one
76
Chapter 2 Loading Logos Sequence (DECLLG)
•Logo ID is a string of one to four numerals that identify the logo.
•Comment Length is a one digit number (0 through 7) that defines
the length of the comment field. The comment field provides
additional logo information, and appears in the status report;
however, it is not part of the logo identification. Also listed on
the status report are the IDs and the comment field of the
logos available in the printer.
•Logo Length is a five digit number (00001 through 65,535), that
defines the length of the logo record. The logo length
includes all characters other than C0 control characters (0/0
through 1/15).
The row data string consists of one or more row records
describing the format of the logo image. Within this string is a row
record, which is a sequence of parameters that define the height
and length of the black and white segments in mils. A row
sequence has the following format: r;s; n1;n2;...\ where the
following is true:
r = height of the segment in mils
s = row starting color. Defines whether the row starts with a white
(0) or a black (1) segment. Each subsequent segment will be
the opposite color from the previous segment.
n1; n2 = length of the segments in mils.
\ = row terminator
Note that none of the above parameters should exceed 65,535 in
value. Editing control characters such as CR and LF, can be
embedded within the logo record.
77
Select Logo Sequence (DECILG)
ASCII Code CSI Pn & }
Hex Code 9B Pn 26 7D
Dec Code 155 Pn 38 125
Purpose Prints selected logos present in printer memory.
DiscussionPn defines the ID of the selected logo. If no logo exists for that ID,
the sequence is ignored. Logos are printed in the current
page orientation and graphics density.
Before you select a logo sequence, set the logo density with
DECSGD and the orientation. When the logo sequence is
complete, reset the density and set cursor position. At the
end of a Select Logo sequence, the cursor remains in the
starting position.
If the height of the segments is not an integral multiple of the
density selected, the size of the printed logo might change
due to accumulated round-off errors. To maintain a uniform
size, print logos only in the densities for which they were
designed.
Deleting Logos Sequence (DECDLG)
ASCII Code CSIP1;P2;...;Pn&|
Hex Code 9B P1 3B P2 3B 2E2E2E 3B PN267C
Dec Code 155 P1 59 P2 59 464646 59 PN38124
Purpose Deletes logos from printer memory.
DiscussionP1 defines the logos to be deleted:
When P1 = 0, parameters P2 through P16 make up the ID of
the logos to be deleted. You can select up to 16 logo IDs to
delete. Deleting a logo within a form is not allowed.
P1 Function
0 Delete all logos whose IDs are listed
3 Delete all stored logos
78
Chapter 2 Request Logo Status (DECRLGS)
Request Logo Status (DECRLGS)
ASCII Code CSI'p
Hex Code 1B 27 70
Dec Code 27 39 112
Purpose Gives a status report of the logos available for printing.
DiscussionInvoke this request if you need to know what logos are available
for printing.
Logo Status Report (DECLGSR)
ASCII Code DCS & w LOGO STRING ST
Hex Code 90 26 77 LOGO STRING 9C
Dec Code 144 38 119 LOGO STRING 156
Purpose Reports the logo status in response to the DECRLGS sequence.
DiscussionThe logo string contains a list of all the valid logos loaded in the
printer and their comment strings. Each logo number and
comment start on a new line, separated by commas. Several
examples of logo IDs and comment strings are shown in the
table below:
Logo# Comment
1 Square
3Rectangle
12 Rhombus
79
Page Print Area and Margins
The DEC LG Emulation has no print area limitations; however, smaller page
areas can be selected by using the Page Format Select (PFS) sequence.
Figure 2 shows the two types of page orientation: portrait and landscape, for
normal and extended page formats. If you use the default font (10 cpi, 6 lpi),
the print areas are:
Figure 2. Page Printing Orientations
Normal Page Format: Extended Page Format:
Portrait font: 59 lines per page 66 lines per page
72 characters per line 132 characters per line
Landscape font: 38 lines per page 79 lines per page
100 characters per line 110 characters per line
Portrait
8.5"
11"
Origin
(a) Normal Page Format (8.5 x 11 Inches)
8.5"
11"
14" 14"
(b) Extended Page Format (14 x 11 Inches)
Origin
Portrait
Origin
11"
11
"
11"
Origin
Directionofp
aper movement
throughprinter
80
Chapter 2 Changing the Print Area
In portrait mode, text or graphics prints horizontally (across the paper loaded
in the printer). In landscape mode, text or graphics prints vertically (from
bottom to top of the paper loaded in the printer).
Changing the Print Area
You can change the print area two ways:
1. Set the printed page to one of the predefined formats using the Page
Format Select (PFS) sequence (see page 81). PFS permits you to set
page format with one command.
2. Change the page margins and the number of lines per page with these
sequences:
a. Set Lines Per Physical Page (DECSLPP)
b. Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
c. Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM)
81
Page Format Select (PFS)
ASCII Code ESC[PsSPJ
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 20 4A
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 32 74
Purpose Selects a page format from a list of predefined formats.
DiscussionPs selects one of 12 page formats. Two kinds of format are
available: normal and extended.
In the normal page format, the page home line is 0.5 inches
below the top margin, and the page end line is 0.833 (5/6)
inches above the bottom margin. Normal page formats are:
In the extended page format, the page home line is at the top
margin, and the page end line is at the bottom margin.
Extended page formats are:
Ps Format
0 Portrait text communication (default)
1 Landscape text communication
2 Portrait A4 (210 mm x 297 mm)
3 Landscape A4
4 Portrait North American (NA) letter
5 Landscape North American letter
Ps Format
6 Portrait extended (extend) A4 format
7 Landscape A4
?20 Portrait North American LG private
?21 Landscape North American LG private
?22 Portrait A4 LG private
?23 Landscape A4 LG private
?28 Portrait line printer: 11 inches high x 13.2 inches wide
?29 Landscape line printer: 13.2 inches high x 11 inches wide
82
Chapter 2 Page Format Select (PFS)
The line home and line end positions serve as the left and right edges of the
printed page for justified text. The line home position is the active position
after a carriage return (CR). A carriage return may move the active position
forward or backward in order to reach the line home position.
The page home line is the active line after a form feed (FF). The index (IND),
next line (NL), and carriage return characters cause a form feed when they
pass the page end line. Use the vertical position absolute and relative (VPA
and VPR) sequences to move below the page end line. If a line feed passes
the page end line, the printer prints the current page and performs a form feed
to get to the next page.
Ps parameters 0 through 7 are public (ANSI) parameters: ASCII values 0
through 7. The other six Ps parameters are defined by LG and are called LG
private parameters. These always start with the ? (3/15) character. The kind
of parameters used affect page format. If you chain commands, do not mix LG
private parameters with public parameters.
Table 13 shows the printable area selected with each PFS format. Text area
is for justified text.
Table 13. Paper Dimensions Using PFS Formats
Minimum
P’s Paper
Width Dimensions
Length Print
Width Area
Length Text
Width Area
Length Default
Lines
Normal Page Formats:
0 8.5 11.0 7.7 10.5 7.2 9.7 55
1 11.0 8.5 10.5 7.7 10.0 6.34 38
2 8.0 11.5 7.7 11.0 7.2 9.83 59
3 11.5 8.0 11.0 7.67 10.5 6.33 4
4 8.5 11.0 8.0 10.5 7.5 9.17
5 11.0 8.5 10.5 8.0 10.0 6.5
Extended Page Formats:
6 8.0 11.0 7.7 11.0 7.2 11.0 66
7 11.0 7.5 11.0 7.33 10.5 7.33 44
?20 8.5 11.0 8.0 10.56 8.0 10.56 63
?21 11.0 8.5 10.0 8.5 9.68 8.0 47
?22 8.0 11.0 7.73 10.88 7.73 10.56 63
?23 10.5 8.0 9.68 7.92 9.68 7.92 47
?28 14.0 11.0 13.2 11.0 13.2 11.0 66
?29 11.0 14.87 11.0 13.2 11.0 13.2 79
* The number of lines available at the initial vertical spacing of 6 lines per inch.
83
Table 14 shows the lines per page and the characters per line selected with
the normal and extended PFS formats.
Table 14. Lines Per Page and Characters Per Line Using PFS Formats
Ps Format Description Lines Per Page in Text Area
(Lines Per Inch) Chars. Per Line in Text Area
(Characters Per Inch)
86431012156
Normal Page Formats:
0 Portrait text comm. 73 59 36 27 72 86 108 43
1 Landscape text comm. 50 38 25 19 100 120 115 60
2PortraitA4 79593929728610843
3 Landscape A4 50 38 25 19 105 126 157 63
4PortraitNAletter 73553627759011245
5 Landscape NA letter 52 33 26 19 100 120 150 60
Extended Page Formats:
6PortraitextendedA488664433728610843
7 Landscape A4 format 58 44 29 22 105 126 157.5 63
?20 Portrait NA LG 85 63 36 27 80 96 120 48
?21 Landscape NA LG 63 47 26 19 100 116 150 60
?22 Portrait A4 Private LG 84 63 42 31 73 87 109 43
?23 Landscape A4 Private
LG 63 47 31 23 96 116 145 79
?28 Portrait line printer 88 66 44 33 132 158 198 79
?29 Landscape line printer 105 79 52 39 110 132 165 66
84
Chapter 2 Page Format Select (PFS)
Table 15 shows the printable area extending beyond the text area when
working in normal and extended PFS formats.
NOTE: After a power-up or reset sequence, no page format is selected.
Reset the printer with the Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) or the
Reset to Initial State (RIS) sequence.
Backward Compatibility
The page formats described in this section are compatible with previous LG
printers. That is, the line home position is the first printable position on the left
of the page, and the page home line is the top line on the page.
Likewise, the private PFS values, ?20 through ?29, set the margins, the line
home position, and the page home line to the edge of the printable area, for
compatibility with previous LG printers. The PFS values depend upon the
values in effect for character and line spacing.
Table 15. Printable Area Extending Beyond Text Area in PFS Formats
Ps Format Description Lines Per Page in Text Area
(Lines Per Inch) Chars. Per Line in Text Area
(Charcters Per Inch)
8 6 4 3 10 12 15 6
Normal Page Formats:
0 Portrait text comm. 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
1 Landscape text comm. 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
2 Portrait A4 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
3 Landscape A4 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
4 Portrait NA letter 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
5 Landscape NA letter 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
Extended Page Formats:
6 Portrait extended A4 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
7 Landscape A4 format 4/6 3/5 2/3 1/2 5/2 6/2 7/3 3/0
?20 Portrait NA LG 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
?21 Landscape NA LG 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
?22 Portrait A4 Private LG 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
?23 Landscape A4 Private LG 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
?28 Portrait the printer 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
?29 Landscape line printer 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
85
Set Lines Per Physical Page (DECSLPP)
ASCII Code ESC[Pnt
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 74
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 116
Purpose Defines form length.
DiscussionA form's length equals the maximum distance the paper moves
when a form feed command is issued. Maximum form length
is 33 inches.
DECSLPPsetsthetopmarginto1andthebottommarginto
the form length. Form length limits the range of possible
settings for the Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
sequence.
Pn sets the form length, subject to the limits discussed
above. If Pn is 0 or is greater than the maximum size for the
paper and origin, the form length will automatically be set to
the maximum for the paper and origin. Units of measurement
are character cells, decipoints, or pixels. Select the unit by
using the Position Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit
(SSU) sequences. If you use character cells, the height of
each cell equals the current line height setting. You can
change line height by changing the vertical spacing.
Initial value: Pn =0.IfaPn valueisnotset,theformlengthis
setto66lines.
Other control sequences are specified in “Forms,” page 66.
86
Chapter 2 Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
ASCII Code ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 r
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 72
Dec Code 27 91 Pn1 59 Pn2 114
Purpose Sets the top and bottom margins, and the page home line. These
settings are relative to the current origin point for page
coordinates. (Refer to “Page Format Select” on page 86.)
DiscussionPn1 sets the top margin and the page home line. Pn2 sets the
bottom margin. If the first parameter is greater than the
second parameter, the printer will ignore the sequence. The
unit of measurement can be character cells, decipoints, or
pixels. Select the unit by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM)
and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences. If you use character
cells, the height of each cell equals the current line height
setting. Change line height by changing the vertical spacing.
The top vertical margin defines the first printable line on a
page. The bottom vertical margin defines the last printable
line. These are called hard margins because you cannot print
outside the area defined by the margins. The page home line
is the position of the first printable line on the page after a
form feed (FF).
Margins settings go into effect as soon as they are received.
The printer will set the margins where specified, except in the
following cases:
•If Pn1 = 0 or is omitted, the top margin is unchanged.
•If Pn2 = 0 or is omitted, the bottom margin is unchanged.
•If Pn2 is greater than the form length, the bottom margin is
set at the bottom of the form.
•If the active position is less than the new top margin, the
active position is set to the new top margin. If the active
line is greater than the new bottom margin, the next
printable character causes a form feed (FF).
•If the sequence sets the top margin below the bottom
margin, the command is ignored.
•The printer does not permit any part of the character box to
be greater than the bottom margin line or less than the
top margin line.
If the form length is changed, the printer sets the top margin
to line 1 and the bottom margin to the form length.
87
Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM)
ASCII Code ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 s
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 73
Dec Code 27 91 Pn1 59 Pn2 115
Purpose Sets the left and right margins.
DiscussionPn1 sets the left margin and the line home position. Pn2 sets the
right margin. If the first parameter is greater than the second
parameter, the printer will ignore the sequence. The unit of
measurement can be character cells, decipoints, or pixels.
The maximum allowable value of the Pn1 parameter is
always one less than the Pn2 parameter.
The left horizontal margin defines the first printable position
on a line. The right horizontal margin defines the last
printable position on a line. These are called hard margins
because you cannot print outside the area defined by the
margins, except under two conditions:
1.Using the Drawing Vectors (DECVEC) sequence, you can
draw lines outside the margins.
2.If you justify text, but the spacing between words is less
than the minimum specified width of the space character,
the text will print unjustified and will exceed the right
margin.
Margins settings go into effect as soon as they are received.
The printer will set the margins where specified, except in the
following cases:
•If Pn1 = 0 or is omitted, the left margin is unchanged.
•If Pn2 = 0 or is omitted, the right margin is unchanged.
•If Pn2 is greater than the printable width, the right margin is
set to the right printable limit.
•If the sequence sets the left margin to the right of the right
margin, the command is ignored.
•If the active position is less than the new left margin, the
active position is set to the new left margin.
•If Autowrap is enabled and the active position is grater than
the specified right margin, the next printable character
causes a carriage return/line feed before the next
character is printed. If Autowrap is disabled (truncated),
the characters that follow this command are ignored until
the cursor is returned to the printable area.
•When character pitch is changed but the same physical
margins are desired, reset the margins using this escape
sequence before sending data. Changing horizontal pitch
resets the left and right margins to their printable limits
(column 1 and the furthest right position, respectively).
88
Chapter 2 Active Column and Active Line (Cursor Motion)
Active Column and Active Line (Cursor Motion)
This section describes cursor positioning command sequences. Line printers
do not have a cursor like the blinking place-marker on most computer
screens. The cursor position on a line printer is the space where the next
character will print. In this manual, cursor refers to the currently active print
position. Its location is the intersection of the active column and active line.
Horizontal and vertical positioning command sequences allow you to move
the active position anywhere on the logical page.
You can also specify either absolute or relative motion. Absolute motion
specifies the distance to move from a specific point on the logical page.
Relative motion specifies the distance to move from the currently active print
position.
The Partial Line Up (PLU) and Partial Line Down (PLD) command sequences
set half line increments for superscripting and subscripting.
NOTE: Next Line (NEL), Reverse Index (RI), and Index (IND) control
characters also move the active position. (Refer to Table 2.)
Forward Index (IND)
ASCII Code ESC D
Hex Code 1B 44
Dec Code 27 68
Purpose Causestheactivepositiontomovetothefollowingline's
corresponding horizontal character position.
DiscussionPn specifies the active position.
Attempts to move the cursor below the bottom margin cause
the cursor to move to the corresponding horizontal position
on the first printable line of the next form.
In 8-bit mode, the Forward Index 8-bit control code can be
used for this function (refer to “Control Code Types” on page
23).
89
ReverseIndex(RI)
ASCII Code ESC M
Hex Code 1B 4D
Dec Code 27 77
Purpose Causes the active position to move to the corresponding
character position of the preceding line.
DiscussionPn specifies the active position. The Reverse Index command
causes the active position to stop at the top margin.
In 8-bit mode, the Reverse Index 8-bit control code can be
used for this function (refer to “Control Code Types” on page
23).
Next Line (NEL)
ASCII Code ESC E
Hex Code 1B 45
Dec Code 27 69
Purpose Causes the active position to move to the first character position
on the following line.
DiscussionIf you try to move the cursor past the bottom margin, the cursor
moves to the first character position on the first printable line
of the next form.
In 8-bit mode, the Next Line 8-bit control code can be used
for this function.
90
Chapter 2 Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)
Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)
ASCII Code ESC[Pn`
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 60
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 96
Purpose Selects the active column on the active line.
DiscussionPn value specifies the new active column. Default value: Pn =1.
If you try to move the active column to the right of the last
position on the line, the active position stops at the last
position on the line.
Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)
ASCII Code ESC[Pna
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 61
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 97
Purpose Moves the active column by adding the value Pn to the currently
active column.
DiscussionPn is the value added to the currently active column.
Default value: Pn =1.
If you try to move the active column to the right of the last
position on the line, the active position stops at the last
position on the line.
91
Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)
ASCII Code ESC[Pnj
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 6A
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 106
Purpose Moves the active column backward by subtracting the value Pn
from the currently active column.
DiscussionPn is the value subtracted from the currently active column.
Default value: Pn =1.
If you try to move the active column to the left of the first
position on a line, the active position stops at the first position
on that line.
Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)
ASCII Code ESC[Pnd
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 64
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 100
Purpose Causes the active position to be moved to the corresponding
horizontal position at vertical position Pn.
DiscussionPn is the new active line at the currently active column. Default
value: Pn = 1.
If Pn is less than the current active line, the active line moves
backwards on the current page. If you try to move the active
line below the bottom line, the active position stops at the
bottom.
92
Chapter 2 Vertical Position Relative (VPR)
Vertical Position Relative (VPR)
ASCII Code ESC[Pne
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 65
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 101
Purpose Moves the active line to the corresponding horizontal position by
adding Pn to the value of the currently active line.
DiscussionPn is the value added to the currently active line. Default value:
Pn =1.
If you try to move the active line below the bottom line, the
active position stops at the bottom line.
Vertical Position Backward (VPB)
ASCII Code ESC[Pnk
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 6B
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 107
Purpose Moves the active position to the corresponding column at the
preceding vertical position set by the Pn value.
DiscussionPn is the value subtracted from the currently active line. Default
value: Pn =1.
If you try to move the active line above the top line, the active
position stops at the top line.
93
Cursor Up (CUU)
ASCII Code ESC[PnA
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 41
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 65
Purpose Causes the active position to move to the corresponding column
at the preceding vertical position set by the Pn value.
DiscussionIf you try to move the active position above the top line, the active
position stops at the top line.
Pn is the number of lines that the active line moves up at the
current active column. Default value: Pn =1.
Partial Line Up (PLU) - Superscripting
ASCII Code ESC L
Hex Code 1B 4C
Dec Code 27 76
Purpose Print superscripted characters.
DiscussionThis sequence moves the active position up a distance equal to
1/12”. The Partial Line Down (PLD) sequence returns the
active position to the previous baseline.
The printer prints superscripted characters that go over the
top page margin without disrupting the baseline of the
superscripted characters. If PLU occurs while the active
position is over the top margin, it has no effect; however,
other active line-affecting control functions still produce their
distinctive effect.
For example, if the active line is over the top margin, a
carriage return <CR> places the active line at the top of the
margin and characters are imaged as superscript until
disabled. If the active line is below the bottom margin, a
carriage return <CR> performs a form feed and characters
are imaged as superscripts until disabled.
94
Chapter 2 Partial Line Down (PLD) - Subscripting
Partial Line Down (PLD) - Subscripting
ASCII Code ESC K
Hex Code 1B 4B
Dec Code 27 75
Purpose Print subscripted characters.
DiscussionThis sequence moves the active position down 1/12”. The Partial
Line Up (PLU) sequence returns the active position to the
previous baseline.
The printer prints subscripted characters that go over the
bottom page margin. If PLD occurs while the active position is
over the bottom margin, it has no effect.
Tab Stops
A tab stop is a predetermined point to which the active position moves when
you send the HT and VT tab commands. The active position is where the next
character will print. A page can have a maximum of 32 horizontal tabs, and a
maximum of 67 vertical tabs.
You can set horizontal and vertical tabs. The printer will ignore tab setting
commands for tabs already set. Likewise, the printer will ignore tab clearing
commands for tabs already cleared. The current origin of printing is the
reference point for tabs.
95
Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS)
ASCII Code ESC[Pn; ...; Pnu
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 3B ... 3B Pn 75
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 59 ... 59 Pn 117
Purpose Pn denotes a horizontal tab stop location.
DiscussionDECSHTS allows you to select up to 16 horizontal tab stops at
one time. Thirty-two possible horizontal tab stops are
available, however, any sequence beyond 16 is ignored. The
Pn values can be in any order in the escape sequence.
The unit of measurement can be character cells, decipoints,
or pixels. It is selected by using the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences. If you select
character cells, the width of each cell equals the current
character width setting. Character width is determined by
setting the horizontal spacing.
When you assign a new tab stop value, each new tab stop
value is inserted into the current tab stop list, starting after the
old tab stop with the next lower value. If you assign more than
the maximum of 16 new tab settings, the printer discards the
old tab stop with the highest value before entering each
additional new tab stop. If the new tab stop has the highest
value and you have set the maximum allowed number of tab
stops, the printer ignores the new tab stop.
If a tab stop is not on the boundary of a character cell,
tabbing to that tab stop in print mode forces the printer to the
nearest character position.
96
Chapter 2 Horizontal Tab Stops (HTS)
Horizontal Tab Stops (HTS)
ASCII Code ESC H
Hex Code 1B 48
Dec Code 27 72
Purpose Causes a horizontal tab stop to be set at the current position.
DiscussionA horizontal tab stop can also be achieved in 8-bit mode by
sending the HTS 8-bit control code.
Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS)
ASCII Code ESC[Pn; ...; Pnv
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn 3B ... 3B Pn 76
Dec Code 27 91 Pn 59 ... 59 Pn 118
Purpose Sets vertical tabs at the rows indicated.
DiscussionPn denotes a vertical tab stop location. Select up to 16 vertical
tabs in one sequence. Up to 67 vertical tab stops can be set
per page. The default is set to stop at every line.
The unit of measurement can be character cells, decipoints,
or pixels. It is selected by using the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences. If you select
character cells, the height of each cell equals the current
character line-height setting. Character height is determined
by setting the vertical spacing.
The printer sets vertical tab stops at positions you select.
New tab stop values are added to the current tab stop list,
starting with the lowest value to be added. If the number of
tab settings exceeds the number of available positions, the
printer ignores any tab stop after the 67 values are stored.
97
Vertical Tab Stops (VTS)
ASCII Code ESC J
Hex Code 1B 4A
Dec Code 27 74
Purpose Causes a vertical tab stop to be set at the current position.
DiscussionAverticaltabstopcanalsobeachievedin8-bitmodebysending
the HTS 8-bit control code.
Tab Clear (TBC)
ASCII Code ESC[Psg
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 67
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 103
Purpose Clear one or all horizontal or vertical tab stops.
DiscussionPs selects which tab stops to clear.
Ps Tab Clear Action
0 Clear one horizontal tab stop at the active position
1 Clear one vertical tab stop at the active line
2 or 3 Clear all horizontal tab stops
4 Clear all vertical tab stops
98
Chapter 2 Character Set Selection
Character Set Selection
To make a character set available for printing, you must designate the set as
either G0, G1, G2, or G3. The designated set is then invoked into GL or GR
using single or locking shift, and can be used for printing.
National Replacement Characters (NRCs) are created by replacing the
relevant characters in the U.S. ASCII character set upon receipt of the
appropriate control sequences.
Single and Locking Shifts
A single shift (SS2 or SS3), effects only the first printable GL character
following the single shift sequence (refer to “Special Parsing Requirements”
on page 32).
A locking shift (LS2, LS3, LS1R, LS2R, or LS3R) persists until another locking
shift is invoked.
Table 16 gives the sequences that select the active character sets.
Table 16. Select Active Character Sets Using Single and Locking Shifts
Name Mnemonic Sequence
(Escape/Hex) Function
Single Shift 2 SS2 ESC N
1BH 4EH The character that follows SS2 selects
from the G2 character set.
Single Shift 3 SS3 ESC O
1BH 4FH The character that follows SS3 selects
from the G3 character set.
Locking Shift 0 LS0 <SI>
OFH The G0 character set becomes the
active GL character set.
Locking Shift 1 LS1 <SO>
OEH The G1 character set becomes the
active GL character set.
Locking Shift 2 LS2 ESC n
1BH 6EH The G2 character set becomes the
active GL character set.
Locking Shift 3 LS3 ESC o
1BH 6FH The G3 character set becomes the
active GL character set.
Locking Shift 1 Right LS1R ESC ~
1BH 7EH The G1 character set becomes the
active GR character set.
Locking Shift 2 Right LS2R ESC }
1BH 7DH The G2 character set becomes the
active GR character set.
Locking Shift 3 Right LS3R ESC |
1BH 7CH The G3 character set becomes the
active GR character set.
99
Select Character Set Sequences (SCS)
The Select Character Set Sequence (SCS) assigns a character set to the G0,
G1, G2, or G3 character set designators. Table 17 gives the sequences that
select the available 94-Character Sets. Table 18 gives the sequences that
select the available 96-Character Sets.
Table 17. Selecting 94-Character Sets Using Single and Locking Shifts
Character Set G0 G1 G2 G3
U.S. ASCII ESC(B ESC)B ESC*B ESC+B
DEC Finnish ESC(5 ESC)5 ESC*5 ESC+5
French (France) ESC(R ESC)R ESC*R ESC+R
DEC French Canadian ESC(9 ESC)9 ESC*9 ESC+9
German ESC(K ESC)K ESC*K ESC+K
Italian ESC(Y ESC)Y ESC*Y ESC+Y
JIS Roman ESC(J ESC)J ESC*J ESC+J
DEC Norwegian/Dutch ESC(6 ESC)6 ESC*6 ESC+6
Spanish ESC(Z ESC)Z ESC*Z ESC+Z
DEC Swedish ESC(7 ESC)7 ESC*7 ESC+7
DEC Great Britain ESC(A ESC)A ESC*A ESC+A
ISO Norwegian/Danish ESC(‘ ESC)’ ESC*’ ESC+’
DEC Dutch ESC(4 ESC)4 ESC*4 ESC+4
DEC Swiss ESC(= ESC)= ESC*= ESC+=
DEC Portuguese ESC(%6 ESC)%6 ESC*%6 ESC+%6
VT100 Graphics ESC(0 ESC)0 ESC*0 ESC+0
DEC Supplemental ESC(%5 or
ESC(< ESC)%5 or
ESC)< ESC*%5 or
ESC*< ESC+%5 or
ESC+<
DEC Technical ESC(> ESC)> ESC*> ESC+>
ISO Katakana ESC(I ESC)I ESC*I ESC+I
7-Bit Hebrew ESC(%= ESC)%= ESC*%= ESC+%
7-Bit Turkish ESC(%2 ESC)%2 ESC*%2 ESC+%2
Greek Supplemental ESC(“? ESC)”? ESC*”? ESC+”?
Hebrew Supplemental ESC(“4 ESC)”4 ESC*”4 ESC+”4
Turkish Supplemental ESC(%0 ESC)%0 ESC*%0 ESC+%0
NOTE: Any other character following the above escape sequences causes the entire sequence to be
ignored.
100
Chapter 2 Select Character Set Sequences (SCS)
Table 18. Selecting 96-Character Sets Using Single and Locking Shifts
Character Set G0 G1 G2 G3
ISO Latin 1 ESC-A ESC.A ESC/A
ISO Latin 2 ESC-B ESC.B ESC/B
ISO Latin 5 ESC-M ESC.M ESC/M
ISO Latin 9 ESC-b ESC.b ESC/b
ISO Cyrillic ESC-L ESC.L ESC/L
ISO Greek ESC-F ESC.F ESC/F
ISO Hebrew ESC-H ESC.H ESC/H
NOTE: Any other character following the above escape sequences causes the entire sequence
to be ignored.
101
Assign User Preference Supplemental Set (DECAUPSS)
ASCII Code DCS Ps ! u D...D ST
Hex Code 90 Ps 21 75 *...* 9C
Dec Code 144 Ps 33 117 *...* 156
Purpose Assigns a particular character set to the User Preference
Supplemental (UPS) set.
DiscussionAssigns several of the ISO and special character sets to the User
Preference Supplemental set. Before selecting one of the
character sets in Table 19 via the SCS code, you may first
assign it to the UPS set using this control code.
NOTE: If values for Ps and D...D are selected other than those in Table 2-19,
this command will be ignored.
Ps Parameter
Ps indicates whether the specified UPS set is a 94-character or a 96-
character set:
Table 19. UPS Character Sets
Character Set Ps D...D
DEC Supplemental 0 %5
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental 1 A
ISO Latin-Hebrew Supplemental 1 H
DEC Technical 0 >
ISO Latin-Greek Supplemental 1 F
ISO Latin 9 1 b
Ps1 Function
0 94-character set
1 96-character set
102
Chapter 2 Assign User Preference Supplemental Set (DECAUPSS)
D...D Parameter
D...D is a string that contains the character set identifier. See SCS in this
chapter for a list of intermediate and final characters. The identifier for the
character set in this command is the same as the final character(s) in the
identifier listed for the Select Character Set (SCS) sequence (see page 99).
Examples
To assign LG Supplemental as the User Preference Supplemental character
set, use the following DECAUPSS command:
DCS0!u%5ST
To assign ISO Latin-1 Supplemental as the User Preference Supplemental
set, use the following command:
DCS1!uAST
103
Product Identification (DA)
ASCII Code ESC[cor ESC[0 c
Hex Code 1B 5B 63 1B 5B 30 63
Dec Code 27 91 99 27 91 48 99
Purpose Shows the product identification.
DiscussionWhen the host computer sends a device attributes (DA)
sequence, the printer immediately sends an answering
sequence that identifies the printer. The printer will answer as
follows:
DEC LG Emulation Product ID ESC [ ? <45>c 1B 5B 3F 34
35 63
PrinterStatusRequestsandReports
The host computer can send Device Status Requests (DSRs) to the printer,
which will then respond with status reports about its operational condition.
The printer will send reports to the host that are brief or extended, and
solicited or unsolicited. Unsolicited status reports are sent only when an error
occurs and only when unsolicited status reports are specifically enabled.
Unsolicited status reports are sent after the current page prints, and list each
error type once. Printer default is unsolicited reports disabled.
NOTE: This option will work properly only if the printer has the serial interface
selected, and if the RTS option on the host interface serial menu is
set to True (the default). Refer to the Printronix P5000 series with
DEC LG Emulation
Setup Guide
, Chapter 4, for the Host Interface
menu.
104
Chapter 2 Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer Responses
Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer Responses
The host computer sends the DSR sequences listed below to request status
reports and to enable or disable unsolicited status reports.
NOTE: Unsolicited status reports, when enabled, are sent when any
reportable status or error condition occurs. (Unsolicited reports are
initially disabled.)
Printer responses to these commands are discussed on the following pages.
Printer Status Reports
The printer sends a Device Status Report (DSR) to the host via the serial line
when requested by the host (DSR) or when unsolicited reports have been
previously enabled and a reportable status condition has occurred. The host
can request a brief or extended status report, as follows:
NOTE: The question mark (?) character occurs only once per DSR
sequence.
•Brief, Unsolicited Messages Enabled:
Table 20. DSR Sequences
Request Sequence Printer Response
CSI 0 n or CSI 5 n Send an extended status report.
CSI 6 n Send a cursor position report.
CSI ? 1 n Disables all unsolicited status
reports from printer.
CSI ? 2 n Enable brief, unsolicited status
reports and send an extended
status report.
CSI ? 3 n Enable extended, unsolicited status
reports and send an extended
status report.
Request Sequence Printer Response
CSI n1 n n1 = 3 If a malfunction is detected
n1 = 0 After error condition has
been corrected or if no
malfunction exists.
105
•Extended, Unsolicited Messages Enabled:
•Cursor Position Report: The unit of measurement can be character cells,
decipoints, or pixels. It is selected by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM)
and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences.
Values of Pn (up to three digits) are defined in page 107. Printer status codes
are reported in pairs: a generic error code first, then a specific error code.
A hardware failure consists of any errors listed in “Self-test error messages”
and “Font Checksum Errors found at Initialization.”
Request Sequence Printer Response
CSI 0 n CSI ? 2 0 n After error condition has
been corrected or if no
malfunction exists
CSI 3 n CSI ? Pn;...Pn n If a malfunction is
detected
Pn = Generic error code (See Table 21.)
Pn n = Specific error code (See Table 21.)
Request Sequence Printer Response
CSI Pn1 ;Pn2 R Pn1 is the active line
pn2 is the active column
106
Chapter 2 Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer Responses
1. Communication failures are usually attributed to parity errors, framing
errors, or receipt of an erroneous character.
2. Failures designated as events are reset only when an extended report is
sent. If set for solicited reports, the events are reset only after the report is
requested and reported. If set for unsolicited reports, the report is
immediately sent and the event cleared.
3. RIS and DECSTR reset any event not reported.
4. All non-events are not latched, but continuously reflect the current state of
the relevant parameter.
107
Table 21. Printer Status Error Codes
Generic Fault Codes Specific Number
Codes LCD Message
21 134 Req. Font Deleted
24 125 Off-Line
25 Paper Jam
26 Cover Open
27 206 Paper Out
31 Emul Switch Err
32 216 Paper Fault
36 220 Platen Open
37 222 Bad Font Data
38 229 Ribbon Stall
40 124 Char. Not In Font
41 101 Page Too Complex
41 102 Margins Exceeded
41 105 Page Too Big
41 108 Out of Form Mem
42 112 Font Load Fault
43 116 Invalid Params
44 103 Too Many Fonts
44 108 Too Many Forms
44 109 Too Many Logos
47 113 Too Many Errors
48 118 Bad Form Data
48 119 Bad Logo Data
48 140 VFU Seq. Error
48 141 VFU Load Fmt Err
48 142 VFU TOF/BOF Err
108
Chapter 2 Assigning and Selecting Font Files
Assigning and Selecting Font Files
Each font file stored in the printer includes data for one of the three standard
character sets: ASCII, DEC Supplemental, and DEC Technical.
Each font file also includes data for one font, which is part of a type family.
You can identify font files by type family ID, font ID, and font file ID. (Refer to
Appendix C.)
The type family ID consists of seven characters. The type family IDs for the
standard type families used with resident font files are listed below.
The font ID has 16 characters (no lowercase letters permitted) and describes
the seven basic font attributes (including type family) of the resident fonts.
Appendix C lists the standard type family, font, and font file IDs for the
resident files.
To make a font file available for printing, you must assign a Select Graphic
Rendition (SGR) number (page 111) to the file. Then you can select the SGR
number for printing.
Default Fonts
When you power up or reset the printer, it selects SGR number 10 for printing
and data processing, and SGR number 19 for plotting and LG Near Letter
Quality, unless you have selected and saved another default.
Type Family Identification (ID) String
Data Processing DBULTN1
Compressed Print DCMPRESS
Correspondence Plot DCRRSPL
Correspondence Print DCRRSPN
Draft Plot DDRAFT0
High Speed Draft Print DDRAFT1
LG Near Letter Quality DLGNRLQ
Low Density Plot DLODENS
OCR A ROCRA00
OCR B ROCRB00
109
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF)
ASCII Code DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 } ID String ST
Hex Code 90 Ps1 3B Ps2 7D ID String 9C
Dec Code 144 Ps1 59 Ps2 125 ID String 156
Purpose Assigns an SGR number to a font ID or type family ID.
DiscussionThe DECATTF sequence assigns a type family ID (seven
characters) or a font ID (16 characters) to an SGR number
from 10 to 19. The SGR sequence can then select that font
for printing (see page 111).
Each font file contains an ID string as part of its font record.
Ps1 Parameter
Ps1 selects which font assignment to perform:
Ps1 Function
0 Same as 1 (default)
1 Assign font ID to SGR number
2 Assign type family ID to SGR number
110
Chapter 2 Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF)
Ps2 Parameter
Ps2 selects an SGR number (from 10 to 19) for a type family ID or font ID.
The following table indicates the default SGR number assignments:
Type Family ID or Font ID String
The type family ID or font ID identifies which font file to assign to the SGR
number (Ps2). You must use only uppercase letters for a type family ID or a
font ID.
You can assign up to 10 fonts at one time. Font Assignments may occur
anywhere in the data stream. You can send an unlimited number of assign-
font-number sequences to the printer.
The printer will accept an ID for a font file not currently stored, but if you try to
print or plot a character from the missing font file the printer prints a filled-in
rectangle instead. If you assign an ID to an SGR number that already has an
ID assigned, the new assignment replaces the old one.
Ps2 Assignment ID Font or Type Family
10 Type Family DBULTN1 Data Processing
(print font)
11 Type Family DCRRSPN Correspondence
Print (print font)
12 Font ROCRA00 OCR A (print font)
13 Font ROCRB00 OCR B (print font)
14 Type Family DCMPRSS Compressed (print
font)
15 Type Family DDRAFT1 High Speed Draft
(print font)
16 Type Family DLODENS Low Density Plot (plot
font)
17 Type Family DCRRSPL Correspondence Plot
(plot font)
18 Type Family DDRAFT0 Draft Plot (plot font)
19 Type Family DLGNRLQ LG Near Letter
Quality (plot font)
111
Selecting Fonts for Printing (SGR)
ASCII Code CSI Ps m
Hex Code 9B Ps 6D
Dec Code 155 Ps 109
Purpose Selects fonts for printing or plotting.
NOTE:This SGR sequence format is also used to select
several character attributes. (Refer to page 115.)
You can combine several SGR sequences by
separating Ps values with semicolons ( ; ).
DiscussionThe Ps values range from 10 through 19; each number
corresponds to a font or type family used for printing, as
defined by the DECATTF command (see page 109, which
shows the default assignments for 10 to 19). If you want to
print more than 10 fonts or type families on a page, you must
reassign other IDs to these SGR numbers.
If you select a specific font, all seven font attributes are
already assigned. If you select a type family, you have two
choices for the other six font attributes (type size, spacing,
etc.): you can use the default values for those attributes or
you can change one or more attributes with control
sequences. Thus, selecting a type family gives you more
options.
You can use the select font sequence anywhere in the data
stream. The selected font remains in effect until the printer
receives another select font sequence or a Reset to Initial
State (RIS) sequence. After a power-up RIS sequence, the
printer uses SGR number 10 for print mode and SGR number
19 for plot mode.
Ifyousendanassigntypefamilyorfont(DECATFF)
sequence for the current SGR number, the sequence takes
effect immediately. You do not have to select the current
SGR number.
If you select an SGR number that does not have a type family
ID or a font ID assigned and you try to plot, the filled
rectangle will print.
112
Chapter 2 Deleting Fonts from RAM (DECLFF)
Deleting Fonts from RAM (DECLFF)
ASCII Code DCS0;1;0yST
Hex Code 90 30 3B 31 3B 30 79 9C
Dec Code 144 48 59 49 59 48 121 156
Purpose Deletes fonts from RAM.
DiscussionLG printer emulation fonts are in portrait orientation by default.
Each time you request a landscape orientation and select a
font, the printer creates a rotated font in RAM. The RAM may
fill if you create a number of fonts. The following command
sequence lets you delete fonts from RAM.
NOTE:This command is also used in the LN03 printer for
loading font files. This function is not present in DEC
LG-series printers.
Font Status Sequences
Font status sequences help the host computer control and manage font
memory. The host sends a request font status sequence, and the printer
responds by sending a font status report. The font status report tells the host
which fonts are currently available in the printer.
113
Request Font Status (DECRFS)
ASCII Code CSIPs;Ps"{
Hex Code 9B Ps 3B Ps 22 7B
Dec Code 155 Ps 59 Ps 34 123
Purpose The host computer sends this sequence to request a report of the
fonts available for printing, the memory bytes available for
loading new fonts, or both.
NOTE:This command works only when the printer is
connected to the host through the serial interface.
DiscussionThe Ps parameter selects the type of font status requested:
Ps Function
0 Send both reports (same as 1 and 2) (default)
1 Send status of fonts
2 Send amount of RAM available for rotating fonts,
forms, and logos
114
Chapter 2 Font Status Report (DECFSR)
Font Status Report (DECFSR)
The printer uses this sequence to report the font status requested by the
DECRFS sequence (page 113). There is a separate report for the two types
of status requests.
NOTE: This command works only when the printer is connected to the host
through the serial interface.
Response to a DECRFS request with a Ps parameter of 1:
ASCII Code DCS1"{IDstring ST
Hex Code 90 31 22 7B IDstring 9C
Dec Code 144 49 34 123 IDstring 156
DiscussionThe ID string includes the type family name, the type family ID in
parentheses, a colon ( : ), then a new line(s) with each font
name. A blank line indicates the end of the previous family.
For example,
type family name (type family ID):
font file ID;
font file ID;
type family name (type family ID):
font file ID;
Response to a DECRFS request with a Ps parameter of 2:
ASCII Code DCS 2 " nnn ST
Hex Code 90 32 22 nnn 9C
Dec Code 144 50 34 nnn 156
Discussionnnn represents a decimal number indicating the number of bytes
available in RAM for rotating fonts.
115
Character Attributes (SGR)
Character attributes are enhancements that let you highlight your printed text.
You can select ten character attributes by using Select Graphic Rendition
(SGR) sequences:
•Select font (DEC multinational character set, NLQ, OCR-A, OCR-B)
•Character Expansion via Graphic Size Modification (GSM) sequences
(Double height characters, triple height characters, double width
characters), if the font was selected by family.
•Select Graphic Rendition (Bold, Italics, Underline, Strike through)
Character attribute sequences share the same basic format as the select font
sequence. This type of sequence is called a Select Graphic Rendition (SGR)
sequence:
ESC [ Ps m
You can select more than one character attribute in the same sequence by
including several Ps values separated by semicolons:
ESC [ Ps ; Ps ; Ps m
Once set, a character attribute remains active until you turn it off or reset the
printer.
Ps = 0 (zero) turns off all character attributes.
116
Chapter 2 Character Expansion (GSM)
Character Expansion (GSM)
ASCII Code ESC[Pn1;n2SPB
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps1 3B n2 20 42
Dec Code 27 91 Ps1 109 n2 32 66
Purpose Pn1 multiplies height; n2 multiplies width.
DiscussionThe Character Expansion control sequence allows characters to
be multiplied in both height and width.
Multiply Height
The printer prints double and triple height characters by expanding the single
height character matrix to produce twice or three times the number of vertical
dots per character, respectively. Blank lines are expanded to either twice or
three times the normal height, equal to the height requested. To alter
character height, choose from the following options:
When double/triple height mode is selected, the printer expands vertical print
until the feature is disabled. This feature can be combined with double width
characters. Mixing single, double, and triple height characters on the same
horizontal line is allowable.
Current
Vertical Pitch
(LPI)
Pn1 = 200
Double Height
(LPI)
Pn1 = 300
Triple Height
(LPI)
21
31.5
42
52.51.7
632
842.7
10 5 3.3
12 6 6
117
Multiply Width
The printer prints double width characters by expanding the single width
character matrix to produce twice the number of horizontal dots per character.
When double width characters are selected, the Space character also
expands to twice the normal width. To double character width, invoke the
following CPI:
NOTE: The OCR-A and OCR-B fonts cannot be enlarged. If multiplication
escape sequences are used with them, the escape sequence is
ignored.
Double width characters are considered one-column wide by the printer.
Therefore, existing tab stops are positioned with respect to double width
columns. When double width characters are disabled, the tab stops reposition
to normal width columns.
A default of 100 is used if no values are set for Pn1 or n2.
When vertical expansion is selected, blank lines are also expanded by the
appropriate factor. Likewise, when double width characters are selected,
spaces are expanded to the appropriate factor.
Pn1 and n2 may both be set to 50 or 75 if a size reduction is desired.
Current Width
Pitch (CPI)
n2 = 200
Double Width
(CPI)
10 5
12 6
13.3 6.6
15 7.5
16.7 8.3
118
Chapter 2 Bold Printing
Bold Printing
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turn bold printing on or off.
DiscussionThis sequence causes the printer to print bold text in the same
font currently selected. The values of Ps turn bold printing on
or off.
If the currently selected type family does not have a bold font,
the printer will double-strike with a slight offset (“shadow
print”) when you turn on bold printing. Printing speed is
reduced during shadow printing because each character is
created twice. Note that bolding is not available for OCR-A
and OCR-B fonts.
If the Print Mode option is set to Enable with the control
panel, bold printing will occur with the current print mode font
with maximum printer throughput. If Print Mode is set to
Disable, a plot mode font is used.
Ps Printer Action
1 Turn on bold printing
22 Turn off bold printing
0 Turn off all character attributes
119
Crossed-Out Text
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turn crossed-out printing on or off.
DiscussionWhen enabled, one or more characters print with a cross-through
mark.
Note that crossed-through text printing is not available for
OCR-A and OCR-B fonts.
If the Print Mode option is set to Enable with the control
panel, crossed-out text will print with the current print mode
font with maximum printer throughput. If set to Disable, a plot
mode font is used.
Ps Printer Action
9 Enables crossed-out text
29 Disables crossed-out text
120
Chapter 2 Double Underlined Text
Double Underlined Text
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turns double underlining on or off.
DiscussionWith double underlining on, the printer double underlines all
following printable characters, including spaces. Double
underlining remains in effect (even across page boundaries)
until turned off. Note that if you use a tab with double
underline enabled, the space is doubly underlined. Ps turns
double underlining on or off.
This feature is available to all fonts and pitch settings, only
when the printer is in Print mode and portrait. Double
underlining is disabled when the printer is reset or powered-
off.
Italic Printing
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turn italic printing on or off.
DiscussionText prints in italics only when OCR-A or OCR-B fonts are not in
use and italic printing is selected. The values of Ps turn italic
printing on or off.
When the Print Mode option is set to Enable with the control
panel, print mode fonts (except for OCR) will be italicized
when selected. If set to Disable, underlining is substituted.
Ps Printer Action
21 Turn on double underlining
24 Turn off double underlining
Ps Printer Action
3 Turn on italic printing
23 Turn off italic printing
121
Overlined
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turn overlined printing on or off.
Discussion When enabled, all characters and spaces following the code
are overlined. The values of Ps turn overlined printing on or
off.
Overlined text is only applicable in Print mode.
Turn Off All Attributes
ASCII Code ESC[0m
Hex Code 1B 5B 0 6D
Dec Code 27 91 0 109
Purpose Turns off all font attributes.
Ps Printer Action
53 Turn on overlined printing
55 Turn off overlined printing
122
Chapter 2 Underlined Text
Underlined Text
ASCII Code ESC[Psm
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 6D
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 109
Purpose Turn underlining on or off.
DiscussionWith underlining on, the printer underlines all following printable
characters, including spaces. Underlining remains in effect
(even across page boundaries) until turned off. Note that if
you use a tab with underline enabled, the space will be
underlined. The values of Ps turn underlining on or off.
This feature is available to all fonts and pitch settings. Underlining is disabled
when the printer is reset or powered-off.
Ps Printer Action
4 Turn on underlining
24 Turn off underlining
123
Justification (JFY)
ASCII Code ESC[PsSPF
Hex Code 1B 5B Ps 20 46
Dec Code 27 91 Ps 32 70
Purpose Aligns text at left and right margins.
DiscussionJustification changes the spacing between words. With a justified
line, the first character of the first word is flush with the left
margin, or at the line home position if it differs from the
margin setting. The last character of the line will be at the
right margin. Once enabled, justification remains on until you
turn it off.
Justification places the printer in plot mode. Subsequent text
is then printed in the plot font selected. If you do not select a
font, solid rectangles are plotted.
The printer evenly spaces each word on a justified line. The
space character (SP) indicates a word space to the printer,
and you set the limits for word spacing with the Ps
parameter, as follows:
Ps Printer Action
0 Turn off justification (default)
2 Turn on justification with limits
?2 Turn off justification without limits
124
Chapter 2 Justification (JFY)
When justification with limits is set (Ps = 2), the printer does
not shrink or expand the space character beyond the limits
set by the current font (usually in the 50-200% range). If you
select justification without limits (Ps = ?2), the printer can
shrink the space character to zero.
The printer will not make hyphenation or end-of-line
determinations when justification is turned on, nor will
autowrap operate with justification turned on. Use the
following sequences or control characters to make End-of-
line determinations:
•Carriage Return <CR>
•Form Feed (FF)
•Line Feed (LF)
•Vertical Tab (VT)
•Next Line (NEL)
•Forward Index (IND)
•Reverse Index (RI)
•Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)
The active font determines the distance between characters
in a word. The printer will not autowrap text with justification
turned on; therefore, text that exceeds the printable area is
lost.
The printer does not justify leading spaces; instead, it uses
the default width of the space character (SP). The printer will
not shrink or expand the value of Horizontal Position Relative
(HPR) sequences in the text. If a line contains Horizontal Tab
(HT) or Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA), the printer
justifies text between the last HT and the end of the line only.
125
Sixel Graphics Processing
A sixel is a group of six vertical picture elements (six pixels) that represents a
section of a graphic image. It can be sent in one byte (7 or 8 bits). A bit value
of 1 means print a pixel; a bit value of 0 means leave a space.
The sixel protocol is a bit-imaged rasterised method of transmitting and
displaying graphic images. The printer receives and prints sixel files sent from
the host. These images are printed in monochrome.
NOTE: Sixel graphics is invoked in one of two ways: for use with the new
software and for use with older software versions. This section
describes how to run sixel graphics with the new software. If you are
running older software versions, refer to the appropriate manual for
sixel graphics information.
Sixel protocol is contained within an ANSI defined Device Control String
(DCS) control code. It is invoked by a String Introducer (SI) and is terminated
by the String Terminator (ST) control code. The following components make
up the complete Device Control String for the sixel protocol:
•String Introducer
•Protocol Selector
•Picture Data
•String Terminator
The Device Control String is assembled as follows:
DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 Pn3 ... Pn q <Sixel data> ST;
StringString
Protocol Selector Picture Data
Introducer Terminator
126
Chapter 2 Sixel Graphics Processing
String Introducer
The String Introducer Control code (DCS) identifies the start of the sixel
protocol. The DCS code is 90H in 8-bit mode. In 7-bit mode, it is 1BH, 50H.
Protocol Selector
The protocol selector consists of a string of zero, one, or more numeric
parameters, each separated by the parameter separator character, ;
(semicolon, 3BH). A valid numeric parameter consists of zero, one, or more
digits in the range of 30H - 39H. The protocol selector has the following
format:
ASCIICode Ps1;Ps2;Pn3...Pn q
This selector is defined as follows:
•Set Ps1 to zero and explicitly define the Horizontal Grid Size with the Pn3
parameter. Set the aspect ratio numerator and denominator using the
Pn1 and Pn2 parameters in the Sixel Data Control sequence, “Set Raster
Attributes” on page 131.
•Macro values 2,3, and 5 through 8 are default definitions required by this
printer. If Ps1 is greater than 9, default to Ps1 = 0.
•Ps2 is the background select parameter. It is not used by this printer.
•Pn3 selects horizontal grid size in decipoints (1/720in). This parameter,
used with the aspect ratio, defines grid size.
Macro Value Horizontal Grid Size
(inches) Aspect Ratio (Vert.
Pxls;Horz. Pxls)
0 or none 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
1 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
1 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
2, default to: 1/180 in (.0056) 250:100
3, default to: 1/180 in (.0056) 250:100
4 1/180 in (.0056) 250:100
5, default to: 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
6, default to: 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
7, default to: 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
8, default to: 1/140 in (.0071) 200:100
9, default to: 1/70 in (.0143) 100:100
127
The printer performs default horizontal grid sizes for some decipoint values.
The following table identifies the horizontal grid size used for each parameter
value.
If Pn3 is set to 0 or not present, the horizontal grid size is determined by the
macro parameter (Ps1). Otherwise, Pn3 overrides the Horizontal Grid Size
(HGS) portion of the macro parameter while attempting to preserve the aspect
ratio (A/R). Therefore, when the 250:100 aspect ratio is selected by Ps1, Pn3
must take on one of the following values:
1/180 in, maintain 250:100 A/R and HGS = 1/180 in
1/140 in, maintain 250:100 A/R and HGS = 1/180 in
1/90 in, maintain 250:100 A/R and maintain HGS = 1/90 in
1/70 in, maintain 250:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/90 in
1/35 in, maintain 250:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/90 in
Decipoints (1/720”) Horizontal Grid Size
0 or none No change to HGS defined by Ps1
1, 2, 3 1/180in (.0056 in)
4 1/180in (.0056 in)
5 1/180in (.0056 in)
6 default to: 1/180in (.0056 in)
7 default to: 1/180in (.0056 in)
8 1/180in (.0056 in)
9 default to: 1/180in (.0056 in)
10 1/180in (.0056 in)
11 - 19 default to: 1/180in (.0056 in)
20 1/180in (.0056 in)
21, 22, etc. default to: 1/180in (.0056 in)
128
Chapter 2 Sixel Graphics Processing
When the 200:100 aspect ratio is selected by Ps1, Pn3 must take on one of
the following values:
1/180 in, change to 200:100 A/R and maintain HGS = 1/180 in
1/140 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and HGS = 1/140 in
1/90 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/140 in
1/70 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/70 in
1/35 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/70 in
When the 100:100 aspect ratio is selected by Ps1, Pn3 must take on one of
the following values:
1/180 in, change to 200:100 A/R and maintain HGS = 1/180 in
1/140 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/140 in
1/90 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/140 in
1/70 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and HGS = 1/70 in
1/35 in, maintain 200:100 A/R and change to HGS = 1/35 in
•Pn is reserved for future use. If parameters are received, they will be
ignored without terminating this sequence.
•The final character is designated by the lowercase letter, q, where q
identifies the sequence as the sixel protocol selector and places the
printer in Sixel Graphics mode.
Three control characters cause the Protocol Selector sequence to terminate
and enter Text mode. They are SUB, CAN, and ESC. After the sequence is
terminated and Text mode is entered, the process (SUB, CAN, or ESC)
enacts. All other codes, if received within the Protocol Selector sequence, are
honored without terminating the sequence.
All C1 control codes received while you are defining the Protocol Selector
sequence cause the sequence to terminate and the printer to exit from sixel
character processing. C1 control codes applicable to this printer are then
processed.
Picture Data
Picture data is made up of sixel printable characters and sixel control
characters. All picture data is processed while in Sixel Graphics mode. In this
mode, instead of standard ASCII Text mode processing, characters are
processed by the printer as sixel data, and a graphic image prints.
String Terminator
When the Device Control String parameters have been entered, exit Sixel
Graphics mode using the String Terminator (ST) control code. Exit always
returns the printer to normal text processing.
129
Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode
In Sixel Graphics mode, characters are made up of standard ASCII text
processed as sixel printable characters and sixel control characters.
Sixel Printable Characters
Sixel printable characters are GL characters in the 3F - 7E hex range
decoded as printable characters. Each of these 64 values represent an
encoding of six vertical pixels to be printed. The actual pixel size is defined by
the Horizontal Grid Size parameter and the pixel aspect ratio.
For each bit set to 1, a corresponding print element (or group of elements in
double scale), is activated to form a dot. The least significant bit (0) is
associated with the top print element or group of elements.
An offset of 3FH is subtracted from each graphics printable character
received. This produces a binary value in the 00 - 3F hex range. The 6-bit
binary value obtained after this subtraction represents a six-pixel column
definition. Note that GR characters in the BF - FE hex range are processed as
GL characters by setting the eighth bit to 0. Table 22 shows the binary values
for six-pixel column definition.
If you try to print past the furthest right position, the printer will truncate all
remaining sixel data until the next Graphics Carriage Return ($) or Graphics
New Line (-).
Sixel Control Codes
Sixel control codes are GL characters in the 20 - 3E hex range. The
parameter separator (3B hex) and the parameter digits (30 - 39 hex) are also
included in this range. GR characters in the A0 - BE hex range are processed
as GL characters by setting the eighth bit to 0. Table 2-23 show how the
assigned control characters are processed.
Table 22. Six-Pixel Column Definition
HEX Code ASCII Symbol Binary Value Pixels Action
3F ? 000000 None Advance by a sixel
space.
40 @ 000001 Top Print top pixel only.
5F - 100000 Bottom Print bottom pixel only.
7E ~ 111111 All Print one full column.
130
Chapter 2 Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode
A Sixel Graphics Mode sequence begins with a sixel control character (30H -
39H, 3BH exclusive) and ends with a printable character or another sixel
control character. If the following data is received:
!-200~
the printer ignores the repeat control character, processes the Graphic New
Line, ignores 200 (it is meaningless by itself), and prints the tilde character
once.
Any unassigned control characters, parameters, or parameter separators are
ignored by the printer until the next valid control character or ST is received.
Repeat Introducer (!) and Sequence
A repeat sequence allows repetition of certain characters when a valid
printable character follows an exclamation point (!), the repeat introducer
symbol. For example, the following sequence:
! 10?
21H 31H 30H 3FH
is interpreted to mean “repeat 10 graphic spaces.”
The numeric parameter specifies the number of times to print the character
that follows the repeat introducer. The numeric parameter is a string of
characters in the 30H - 39H range, which is evaluated as a decimal number. If
a numeric parameter is not received or if the parameter is 0, a value of 1 is
assumed. If the parameter is a value larger than the maximum value of
65535, the printer defaults to 65535. All decimal digits are processed as part
of the count.
Table 23. Assigned Control Characters
Hex Code ASCII Symbol Action
21 ! Repeat
Introducer
22 “ Set Raster
Attributes
24 $ GraphicCarriage
Return
2D - Graphic New
Line
30-39 0-9 Numeric
Parameters
3B ; Parameter
Separator
131
A repeat sequence is equivalent to receiving the printable character as many
times as specified by the numeric parameter count. A printable character
ends the repeat sequence processing and causes the printer to print.
Set Raster Attributes
Setting the raster attributes determines the size, shape, and position of the
pixels to be drawn.
After entering Sixel Graphics mode, a valid Set Raster Attributes sequence
must be received before the first sixel printable character is received. The Set
Raster Attributes sequence effects all sixel data that follows.
If a Set Raster Attributes sequence is received after a sixel printable character
is received, the printer still recognizes the sequence but disregards all
parameters and continues processing all sixel data and control codes that
follow the sequence, as if the sequence was never received.
If a Set Raster Attributes sequence is received after a sixel control code (21H
- 24H, 2DH), the printer processes the control code and recognizes but
ignores all Set Raster Attributes sequences that follow. If a Set Raster
Attributes sequence is received after an unspecified LG control code (20H,
25H - 2CH, 2EH, 2FH, 30H - 3EH), the printer ignores the code and
processes the Set Raster Attribute sequence that follows. Because of this,
you can specify a future control code to be received first, and it will be ignored
without consequence to the Set Raster Attributes sequence until the code is
recognized by the printer.
If a Set Raster Attributes sequence is received before any other sixel control
code, the sequence is processed. The protocol selector has the following
format:
ASCII Code " Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4
This selector is defined as follows:
•The double quote (") sets the raster attributes control characters.
•Pn1 sets the pixel aspect ratio numerator.
•Pn2 sets the pixel aspect ratio denominator.
Pn1 and Pn2 are numeric parameters. A numeric parameter is a string of
characters in the 30H - 39H range that is evaluated by the printer as a decimal
number. If the parameter is a value larger than the 65535 maximum, the
printer defaults to 65535.
The pixel aspect ratio defines the shape of the pixel needed to reproduce the
picture without distortion. This ratio is defined by two numbers, a numerator
(Pn1) and a denominator (Pn2). It is the ratio of the vertical to the horizontal
shape of the pixel. For example, an aspect ratio of 2:1 (or 200:100) represents
a pixel twice as high as it is wide. The aspect ratio multiplied by the Horizontal
Grid Size (HGS) yields the ideal Vertical Grid Size (VGS). That is:
Pixel Aspect Ratio x HGS = Ideal VGS.
Table 24 gives the aspect ratios supported by the printer.
132
Chapter 2 Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode
When other aspect ratios (A/R) are requested, they are processed in the
following manner:
- An aspect ratio of less than 1.5:1 uses 1:1 A/R.
- An A/R equal to or greater than 1.5:1, but less than 2.25:1 uses 2:1 A/R.
- An A/R equal to or greater than 2.25:1 uses 2.5:1 A/R.
When determining pixel size, the printer will attempt to preserve the A/R
without exceeding the selected HGS. Therefore, note the following:
When 2.5:1 A/R is selected and the HGS is:
- 1/180 in, the printer maintains a 2.5:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/180 in
- 1/140 in, the printer maintains a 2.5:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/180 in
- 1/90 in, the printer maintains a 2.5:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/90 in
- 1/70 in, the printer maintains a 2.5:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/90 in
- 1/35 in, the printer maintains a 2.5:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/90 in
Pixel Aspect Ratio x HGS = Ideal VGS.
When 2:1 A/R is selected and the HGS is:
- 1/180 in, change the printer to 2.5:1 A/R and HGS to 1/180 in
- 1/140 in, the printer maintains a 2:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/140 in
- 1/90 in, the printer maintains a 2:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/140 in
- 1/70 in, the printer maintains a 2:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/70 in
- 1/35 in, the printer maintains a 2:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/70 in
When 1:1 A/R is selected and the HGS is:
- 1/180 in, the printer maintains a 1:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/180 in
- 1/140 in, the printer maintains a 1:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/140 in
- 1/90 in, the printer maintains a 1:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/140 in
- 1/70 in, the printer maintains a 1:1 A/R and a HGS of 1/70 in
- 1/35 in, the printer maintains a 1:1 A/R and changes HGS to 1/35 in
Table 24. Aspect Ratios Supported by the DEC LG Emulation
Aspect
Ratio Sixel
Scale HGS Horiz.
Dots/Pixel VGS Vert. Dots/
Pixel
2.5:1 Full 1/180 in 1 1/72 in 1
2X 1/90 in 2 1/36 in 2
2:1 Full 1/140 in 1 1/72 in 1
2X 1/70 in 2 1/36 in 2
1:1 .5 1/140 in 1 1/144 in 1/2
Full 1/70 in 1 1/72 in 1
2X 1/35 in 2 1/36 in 2
133
Graphic Carriage Return ($)
The Graphic Carriage Return (GCR) control code causes the active position
to move back to the furthest left position where the first sixel data was printed
after entering Sixel Graphics mode. GCR allows sixel data to overprint lines
by consecutively starting at the same horizontal position. For example, if the
first sixel data prints at column 10, the GCR causes the next line of sixel data
to start at column 10 and not at the left margin.
Graphic New Line (-)
The Graphic New Line (GNL) control code initiates printing, causes the active
position to move to the furthest left position, and advances paper by one sixel
height.
Numeric Parameters (0 - 9)
Some graphic control codes may be followed by a numeric value that is
encoded as an ASCII decimal number (0 - 9) in the 30 - 39 hex range. A
numeric value is terminated by any non-digit, specifically another control code
or a graphics printable character. The default for any numeric parameter is 0.
Parameter Separator (;)
The parameter separator is used to separate a series of numeric parameters.
If a number does not precede the separator or does not follow the separator,
the printer assumes a value of zero.
ASCII Control Characters
In Sixel Graphics mode, the printer ignores all C0 control characters received
except CAN, SUB, and ESC. When the printer receives a CAN control
character, it terminates Sixel graphics mode. A SUB control character is
processed as 3FH (one sixel space), which limits the effect of some
communication line errors. An ESC character terminates Sixel Graphics
mode, but the printer still processes the ESC character.
In Sixel Graphics mode, all C1 control codes terminate Sixel Graphics mode,
then process the C1 control code if it is recognized by the printer.
Graphic Substitute
In Sixel Graphics mode, the SUB character is interpreted as an error
character. The printer remains in Sixel Graphics mode and processes SUB as
a sixel space (3FH). If a repeat sequence is processing when SUB is
selected, the number of sixel spaces required by the repeat count is printed.
Exit Sixel Graphics Mode
The printer exits Sixel Graphics mode when CAN, ESC, or ST are received.
CAN causes the printer to exit Sixel Graphics mode. ESC causes the printer
to exit Sixel Graphics mode and begin processing the ESC sequence. ST
terminates Sixel Graphics mode.
134
Chapter 2 Character Processing in Sixel Graphics Mode
Note that all stored sixel data is printed before the printer exits Sixel Graphics
mode.
State After Exiting Sixel Graphics Mode
After exiting Sixel Graphics mode, the printer returns to the following
conditions:
•The horizontal position before entering Sixel Graphics mode
•The horizontal pitch before entering Sixel Graphics mode
•The vertical position might be modified by control characters received
while in Sixel Graphics mode
•The vertical pitch is the same as before entering Sixel Graphics mode
•All SGR attributes are restored to the state before entering Sixel Graphics
mode
•Additionally, the first Text mode vertical motion command (LF, VT, etc.)
causes the printer to advance to the next Text mode line before executing
the command.
Processing Unused Control Strings
The printer ignores all unused control strings. Unused control strings include
all Operating System commands (OSC), Privacy Messages (PM), and
Application Program commands (APC), as well as all Device Control strings
(DCS), unless they are within Sixel Graphics mode. The following table
describes the different control strings:
Types of Control
Strings 8-bit
Mnemonic/HEX 7-bit
Mnemonic/HEX
Device Control Strings DCS
90H ESC P
1BH 50H
Operating System
Commands OSC
9DH ESC ]
1BH 5DH
Privacy Messages PM
9EH ESC ^
1BH 5EH
Application Program
Commands APC
9FH ESC _
1BH 5FH
135
Control string formats appear in the following ways:
In the above table, P = parameters; I = intermediate characters; F = final
character; D = data; and ST = string terminator (9CH).
Process unused control strings as follows:
•After DCS begins processing the introducer sequence, it will:
1.enter Sixel Graphics mode if the final character is a q
2.process any applicable C0 received
3.enter Text mode if ESC, CAN, SUB, ST, or a C1 is received
4.ignore any GL or GR code received
•After OSC receives an ESC, CAN SUB, ST or C1, it will:
1.enter Text mode
2.ignore any other characters
•After PM receives an ESC, CAN SUB, ST or C1, it will:
1.enter Text mode
2.ignore any other characters
•AfterAPCreceivesanESC,CANSUB,STorC1,itwill:
1.enter Text mode
2.ignore any other characters
Control String
Introducer Data String String
Terminator
DCS P...P I...I F D...D ST
OSC D...D ST
PM D...D ST
APC D...D ST
136
Chapter 2 Drawing Vectors (DECVEC)
Drawing Vectors (DECVEC)
ASCII Code ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; ! |
Hex Code 1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 3B Pn3 3B Pn4 3B Pn5 3B 21 7C
Dec Code 27 91 Pn1 59 Pn2 59 Pn3 59 Pn4 59 Pn5 59 33
124
Purpose Draw horizontal or vertical lines with length and width
DiscussionMargins do not affect line drawing so you can draw lines to the
physical limits of the page. The DECVEC command
sequence draws vectors without changing the currently
active position.
Use the Pn parameters to select the length, width, and
direction of the line. An incorrect Pn value cancels the entire
sequence.
•Pn2 selects the x start position on the page in decipoints.
•Pn3 selects the y start position on the page in decipoints.
•Pn4 Selects the line length in the x direction for an x line.
For a y line, it specifies the y direction length.
0 value is equal to a line one decipoint in length.
•Pn5Selectsthelinewidthintheydirectionforanxline.
For a y line, it specifies the x direction width.
0 value is equal to a line one decipoint in length.
For an x line, Pn4 specifies the length in the x direction, and
Pn5 specifies the width in the y direction. For a y line, Pn4
specifies the length in the y direction, and Pn5 specifies the
width in the x direction.
Pn1 Operation
0 Draw an x line; that is, horizontal with respect
to page orientation.
1 Draw a y line; that is, vertical with respect to
page orientation.
137
Block Characters
The block character sequences define the parameters of the block
characters, initiate the generation of block characters, and return the printer to
normal printing. The following subsections describe how to enact these
features.
Setting Block Character Parameters (DECBCS)
ASCII Code ESC [ P1 ; P2 ; ...P5 ' r
Hex Code 1B 5B P1 3B P2 3B...P5 27 72
Dec Code 27 91 P1 59 P2 59...P5 39 114
Purpose Defines the parameters for block characters.
DiscussionThe Pn parameters define the height, width, background color,
and character set of the block characters. If any parameters
are illegal, the entire sequence is ignored. When block
character parameters are defined, they remain valid until:
•A new valid Block Character Select Parameter sequence is
sent
•A reset command occurs (setting the default values)
•The default values are set by powering-up
The character exists entirely and centrally within the
character cell. The line feed distance is equal to the basic cell
height multiplied by the vertical magnification factor. The
magnification values specified in P1 and P2 are operated on
the basic character cell.
Block character parameters are set according to the following
choices.
•P1 defines the horizontal magnification factor.
The horizontal intercharacter gap for 0 degrees and for 180
degrees rotation is 1/60 inch times the horizontal
magnification factor. Characters rotated 90 degrees and 270
degrees have a horizontal intercharacter gap of 3/60 inch
times the vertical magnification factor.
P1 Function
0/missing Magnification of 2 (default)
1 - 124 Defines the horizontal magnification factor
>124 Magnification factor of 156 used
138
Chapter 2 Setting Block Character Parameters (DECBCS)
•P2 defines the vertical magnification factor. The maximum
value of P2 is limited by page length.
•P3 defines the background color.
•P4 designates the international character set.
•P5 specifies the block character's orientation.
NOTE: When the sequence selects character rotation, each character is
rotated around its axis by the above specified degree.
P3 Function
0/missing White background (default)
1 Black background (inverse video)
P4 Function
0/missing U.S. ASCII (default)
1 Germany
2DECNorway/
Denmark
3France
4 United Kingdom
5Spain
6 Sweden
7Italy
> uses previous setting
P5 Function
0/missing Same as current orientation
1 Portrait (0 degree rotation)
2 Landscape (90 degrees rotation)
3 Reverse landscape (270 degree rotation)
4 Portrait upside down (180 degree rotation)
139
Start Block Character Mode (DECBLOCKC)
ASCII Code ESC%SP1
Hex Code 1B 25 20 31
Dec Code 27 37 32 49
Purpose Generates the block characters from the characters that follow
the sequence.
DiscussionThe block characters inherit the last set of parameters defined. If
no prior sequence exists, the block characters are printed
with:
•0 degree rotation
•In the U. S. ASCII character set
•With a horizontal and vertical magnification factor of 2
•With a white background
Stop Block Character Mode
ASCII Code ESC%@
Hex Code 1B 25 40
Dec Code 27 37 64
Purpose Stops the generation of block characters
DiscussionOnce the block character sequence is stopped, the font
attributes, the CPI settings, and the LPI settings are returned
to their previous values.
140
Chapter 2 Reset to Initial State (RIS)
Reset to Initial State (RIS)
ASCII Code ESC c
Hex Code 1B 63
Dec Code 27 99
Purpose Resets the value or state of several operating features.
DiscussionThis sequence resets the printer to a set of operating values and
conditions similar to the factory default settings. The
operating feature values after a reset are shown in Table 26
(see page 147).
This sequence and the DECSTR reset sequence have the
same function.
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR)
ASCII Code ESC[!p
Hex Code 1B 5B 21 70
Dec Code 27 91 33 112
Purpose Resets the value or state of several operating features.
DiscussionAfter receiving a DECSTR, the printer positions itself at the next
top of form, then resets the value or state of several operating
features. The operating feature values after a reset are
shown in Table 26 (see page 147).
An event occurs when more than two intermediate characters
are received by the printer. The printer notes this event, waits
for the final character, then ignores the entire sequence.
Another way to reset the printer is via the RIS code.
141
Selecting LinePrinter Plus Emulations via DECIPEM
The DEC LG emulation is the default when printer power is turned on, but you
can select the LinePrinter Plus emulation via the DECIPEM control code
sequence. (The SOCS control code sequences described on the following
page accomplish the same result.) The syntax for this sequence follows:
ASCII:CSI?58h
Hex: 9BH 3FH 35H 38H 68H
Entering this control code will select the Proprinter III XL configuration for
LinePrinter Plus.
Refer to the Printronix P5000 series with DEC LG Emulation Printer
Setup
Guide
for information on selecting a LinePrinter Plus protocol and configuring
emulation parameters.
Once you have selected LinePrinter Plus using this control code, you may
enter the following LG-compatible commands, depending on which emulation
is currently selected within LinePrinter Plus:
•If you are in Epson FX or P-Series emulation mode, you may exit back to
the LG emulation by entering the RIS command (see page 140).
•If you are in Proprinter III XL emulation mode, you may enter any of the
following three commands to return to the LG emulation: RIS, DECSTR
(see page 140), or DECIPEM. The DECIPEM escape sequence to exit
from the Proprinter III XL emulation follows:
ASCII: ESC [ ? 5 8 1
Hex: 1BH 5BH 3FH 35H 38H 6CH
Do not use the CSI control code in the DECIPEM control sequence; instead,
use its 7-bit equivalent of ESC [.
Do not use any semicolons.
142
Chapter 2 Selecting LinePrinter Plus Emulations via SOCS
Selecting LinePrinter Plus Emulations via SOCS
The LG emulation is the default when printer power is turned on, but you can
select the LinePrinter Plus emulation via two SOCS control code sequences.
(The DECIPEM control code sequence described on the previous page
accomplishes the same result.) Two acceptable control codes can accomplish
this function, as follows:
ASCII: ESC % =
Hex: 1BH 25H 3DH
ASCII: ESC % SP 2
Hex: 1BH 25H 20H 32H
The first control code sequence selects the Proprinter emulation. The second
control code selects the Epson FX-1050.
Refer to the Printronix P5000 series with DEC LG Emulation
Setup Guide
for
information on selecting a LinePrinter Plus protocol and configuring emulation
parameters.
Once you have selected LinePrinter Plus using this control code, you may
enter the following LG-compatible commands depending on which emulation
is currently selected within LinePrinter Plus:
•If you are in Epson FX or P-Series emulation mode, you may exit back to
the LG emulation by entering the RIS command (see page 140).
•If you are in Proprinter III XL emulation mode, you may enter any of the
following three commands to return to the LG emulation: RIS, DECSTR
(see page 140), or ROCS. The ROCS escape sequence follows:
ASCII: ESC % @
Hex: 1BH 25H 40H
143
7-Bit and 8-Bit Transmissions and Interpretations
This section explains how to select 7-bit or 8-bit encoding of control strings.
Select 7-Bit C1 Transmission (S7C1T)
The sequence below causes the printer to use 7-bit encoding for all C1 control
characters transmitted. All C1 characters are then represented as two-
character ESC sequences.
ASCII: ESC SP F
Hex: 1BH 20 46
Select 8-Bit C1 Transmission (S8C1T)
The sequence below causes the printer to use 8-bit encoding for all C1 control
characters transmitted. All C1 characters are then represented as one-
character CSI sequences.
ASCII: ESC SP G
Hex: 1BH 20 47
Select 7-Bit Code (S7C1R)
In a 7-bit environment, this sequence allows receipt of 7-bit control strings
only.
ASCII: ESC SP 6
Hex: 1BH 20 4A
Select 8-Bit Code (S8C1R)
In an 8-bit environment, this sequence allows receipt of 8-bit control strings
only.
ASCII: ESC SP 7
Hex: 1BH 20 37
144
Chapter 2 Enter Draft Mode
Enter Draft Mode
ASCII Code ESC%/3
Hex Code 1B 25 2F 33
Dec Code 27 37 47 51
Purpose Puts the emulation into high speed draft print mode.
DiscussionAll text following this command will be printed in the high speed
draft font. This mode is slightly faster than the normal printing
mode because of the simplified font. Only the ASCII
character set is available in draft mode. However, if high
speed draft is selected via the control panel or the SGR
command, multinational character sets are also available.
Thehighspeeddraftfontcanalsobeselectedusingthe
operator's control panel. (Refer to Chapter 4 of the Printronix
P5000 series with DEC LG Emulation
Setup Guide
.)
Exit Draft Mode
ASCII Code ESC%@
Hex Code 1B 25 40
Dec Code 27 37 64
Purpose Exit high speed draft mode.
DiscussionUpon receipt of this command, the printer returns to the
previously selected font and resumes printing or plotting.
145
Default Values and States
The printer stores a set of typical operating states and conditions. The first
time you power up the printer, the factory settings in Table 25 are
automatically invoked.
Table 25. Factory Settings
Selectable Parameter Control Function Factory Set Condition
Printing Status ----- Off-line
Horizontal Pitch DECSHORP 10 characters per inch
Vertical Pitch DECVERP 6 lines per inch
Font SGR Data Processing
Forms Length DECSLPP 66 lines (11 inches)
Active Position ----- Column 1, line 1
Top Margin ----- Line 1
Bottom Margin ----- Line 66
Left Margin ----- Column 1
Right Margin ----- Column 132
Underlining SGR Disabled
Bolding SGR Disabled
Italics SGR Disabled
Double Underline SGR Disabled
Overline SGR Disabled
Expansion GSM No character expansion
GL Character Set ----- US ASCII
GR Character Set ----- DEC Supplemental
G0 Character Set ----- US ASCII
G1 Character Set ----- VT100 Graphic
Character Set
G2 Character Set ----- DEC Supplemental
G3 Character Set ----- US ASCII
Autowrap DECAWM Disabled
146
Chapter 2 Default Values and States
Line Feed/New Line
Mode LNM Reset
Horizontal Tabs ----- Stop at every 8 columns
(9, 17...137)
Super/Subscripts ----- Disabled
Carriage Return/NLM DECCRNLM Reset
Vertical Tabs ----- Stop at every line (1-66)
Table 25. Factory Settings
Selectable Parameter Control Function Factory Set Condition
147
Table 26. Reset Condition
Selectable Control Function Reset Condition
Printing Status ---- On-line (Ready)
Horizontal Pitch DECSHORP 10 characters per inch
Vertical Pitch DECVERP 6 lines per inch
Font SGR Data Processing
Forms Length DECSLPP 66 lines (11 inches)
Active Position ---- Column 1 on the current
active line
Top Margin ---- Line 1
Bottom Margin ---- Line 66
Left Margin ---- Column 1
Right Margin ---- Column 132
Underlining SGR Disabled
Bolding SGR Disabled
Italics SGR Disabled
Double Underline SGR Disabled
Overline SGR Disabled
Expansion GSM No character expansion
GL Character Set ---- US ASCII
GR Character Set ---- DEC Supplemental
G0 Character Set ---- US ASCII or the last NRC if
selected
G1 Character Set ---- VT100 Graphic Character
Set
G2 Character Set ---- DEC Supplemental
G3 Character Set ---- US ASCII
Autowrap DECAWM Disabled
Line Feed/New Line
Mode LNM Reset
Horizontal Tabs ---- Stop at every 8 columns (9,
17...137)
148
Chapter 2 Default Values and States
At power-up, the parameter values in Table 27are automatically retained from
the previous power-on session.
Unsolicited Reports DSR Disabled
Super/Subscripts ---- Disabled
Carriage Return/New
Line Mode DECCRNLM Reset
Vertical Tabs ---- Stop at every line (1-66)
Note: The “All Interface Settings” and “National Replacement Character Set”
remain as previously selected via escape sequences or the control panel.
Table 26. Reset Condition
Selectable Control Function Reset Condition
149
Table 27. Power-up Conditions
Selectable Parameter Control Function Factory Set Condition
Horizontal Pitch DECSHORP -----
Vertical Pitch DECVERP -----
Font SGR -----
Forms Length DECSLPP -----
Top and Bottom Margin DECSTBM -----
Left and Right Margin DECSLRM -----
Autowrap DECAWM -----
Line Feed/New Line Mode LNM -----
Carriage Return/New Line Mode DECCRNLM -----
Horizontal Tabs ----- -----
Vertical Tabs ----- -----
Interface Settings ----- -----
GL Character Set ----- US ASCII or the last NRC selected
GR Character Set ----- DEC Supplemental
G0 Character Set ----- US ASCII or the last NRC if selected
G1 Character Set ----- VT100 Graphic Character Set
G2 Character Set ----- DEC Supplemental
G3 Character Set ----- US ASCII
Printing Status ----- Off-line
Active Position ----- Column 1 on the current active line
Underlining SGR Disabled
Bolding SGR Disabled
Italics SGR Disabled
Double Underline SGR Disabled
Overline SGR Disabled
Expansion GSM No character expansion
Unsolicited Reports DSR Disabled
Super/Subscripts ----- Disabled
Justification SSU Disabled
150
Chapter 2 Default Values and States
151
3Character Sets
Introduction
The character sets shown in this chapter are accessible only in LG emulation
mode. In this chapter, each character is described in tables that provide
character descriptions, as well as hex and decimal character locations.
(Appendix A provides graphic representations of the character set matrices.)
Selecting the Character Set and Language
In LG emulation mode, the entire array of language and special character sets
can be selected with host control codes as well as the control panel.
Character set and language selection is made from the host computer using
the SCS control code sequence, described on page 99.
There are no restrictions except for Katakana: It is available only in DP font 10
CPIpitch,andNLQfont10CPIpitch.
The DEC ASCII and all language character sets and several fonts can be
selected at the printer control panel (see Chapter 4 of the
Setup Guide
). You
may select the language set and font style from the control panel as follows:
1. At the control panel, select the “LG Font” option, then the Font Character
set suboption. Cycle through both GL Character Set and GR Character
Set menus to select a current GL and GR Character Set.
2. Select the “LG Font” option, then the Font Style suboption. Cycle through
the font style options, and select a font style.
OCR-A and OCR-B
OCR print modes may also be selected from the configuration menus, as
described in Chapter 4 of the
Setup Guide.
OCR print modes do not contain complete character sets. Available OCR-A
standard characters are dictated by American National Standard Institute
(ANSI) #X3.17-1981, and OCR-A international characters are in accordance
with International Organization for Standardization (ISO) #646-1973.
Available OCR-B standard and extended characters are dictated by ANSI
#X3.49-1975. Undefined OCR characters are replaced with spaces. When an
international language substitution is selected for a non-existent character, no
substitution will occur.
152
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
ASCII Character Set
Graphic symbols of the ASCII Character Set are listed in numeric order by
hexadecimal address. Included is the decimal code and the symbol's name.
Table 28. Graphic Symbols for the ASCII Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Exclamation Point
22 34 Quotation Marks
23 35 Number Sign
24 36 Dollar Sign
25 37 Percent Sign
26 38 Ampersand
27 39 Apostrophe
28 40 Open Parenthesis
29 41 Closed Parenthesis
2A 42 Asterisk
2B 43 Plus
2C 44 Comma
2D 45 Hyphen or Minus
2E 46 Period or Decimal Point
2F 47 Slash
30 48 Zero (Not Slashed)
31 49 One
32 50 Two
33 51 Three
34 52 Four
35 53 Five
36 54 Six
37 55 Seven
38 56 Eight
39 57 Nine
3A 58 Colon
3B 59 Semicolon
3C 60 Less Than Symbol
3D 61 Equals Symbol
ASCII Character Set
153
3E 62 Greater Than Symbol
3F 63 Question Mark
40 64 At Sign
41 65 Uppercase A
42 66 Uppercase B
43 67 Uppercase C
44 68 Uppercase D
45 69 Uppercase E
46 70 Uppercase F
47 71 Uppercase G
48 72 Uppercase H
49 73 Uppercase I
4A 74 Uppercase J
4B 75 Uppercase K
4C 76 Uppercase L
4D 77 Uppercase M
4E 78 Uppercase N
4F 79 Uppercase O
50 80 Uppercase P
51 81 Uppercase Q
52 82 Uppercase R
53 83 Uppercase S
54 84 Uppercase T
55 85 Uppercase U
56 86 Uppercase V
57 87 Uppercase W
58 88 Uppercase X
59 89 Uppercase Y
5A 90 Uppercase Z
5B 91 Open Bracket
5C 92 Backslash
5D 93 Closed Bracket
5E 94 Circumflex
5F 95 Underline
Table 28. Graphic Symbols for the ASCII Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
154
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
60 96 Open Single Quotation Mark/Grave Accent
61 97 Lowercase a
62 98 Lowercase b
63 99 Lowercase c
64 100 Lowercase d
65 101 Lowercase e
66 102 Lowercase f
67 103 Lowercase g
68 104 Lowercase h
69 105 Lowercase i
6A 106 Lowercase j
6B 107 Lowercase k
6C 108 Lowercase l
6D 109 Lowercase m
6E 110 Lowercase n
6F 111 Lowercase o
70 112 Lowercase p
71 113 Lowercase q
72 114 Lowercase r
73 115 Lowercase s
74 116 Lowercase t
75 117 Lowercase u
76 118 Lowercase v
77 119 Lowercase w
78 120 Lowercase x
79 121 Lowercase y
7A 122 Lowercase z
7B 123 Open Brace
7C 124 Solid Vertical Line
7D 125 Closed Brace
7E 126 Tilde
7F 127 Delete
Table 28. Graphic Symbols for the ASCII Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
DEC Multinational Character Sets
155
DEC Multinational Character Sets
A symbol set is the alphabet of a font; it is a character set that can be printed
regardless of the font characteristics designated for the print job. The default
symbol set for the fonts in the printer is the U.S. ASCII set. The U.S. ASCII set
is the base onto which other symbol set overlay sequences may be loaded.
Character set overlays contain characters and symbols that replace certain
ASCII characters to create international alphabets. The printer contains
fourteen multinational character set overlays:
•DEC Great Britain
•DEC Dutch
•DEC Finnish
•French
•DEC French Canadian
•German
•Italian
•JIS Roman
•DEC Norwegian/Danish
•Spanish
•DEC Swedish
•DEC Swiss
•DEC Portuguese
•ISO Norwegian/Danish
The following tables list the replacement characters for the U.S. ASCII set
used to make up language-specific symbols. Language symbol characters
(National Replacement Characters, or NRCs) are substituted for the U.S.
ASCII set at a maximum of twelve locations.
The U.S. ASCII and multinational sets may be selected via the front panel
configuration menus or the SCS control code sequence, described on page
99.
NOTE: Appendix A provides graphic representations of the character set
matrices.
Table 29. DEC Great Britian Character Set
Hex
Value Dec
Code Symbol Name
23 35 Pound Sign
156
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 30. DEC Dutch Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
023 035 Pound Sign
040 064 Fraction Three-Quarter
05B 091 Lowercase y with Umlaut
05C 092 Fraction One-Half
05D 093 Solid Vertical Bar
07B 123 Umlaut
07C 124 Lowercase f (with Fallback for Florin)
07D 125 Fraction One-Quarter
07E 126 Acute Accent
Table 31. DEC Finnish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
05B 091 Uppercase A with Umlaut
05C 092 Uppercase O with Umlaut
05D 093 Uppercase A with Ring
05E 094 Uppercase U with Umlaut
060 096 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
07B 123 Lowercase a with Umlaut
07C 124 Lowercase o with Umlaut
07D 125 Lowercase a with Ring
07E 126 Lowercase u with Umlaut
Table 32. DEC French Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
023 035 Pound Sign
040 064 Lowercase a with Grave Accent
05B 091 Degree Sign
05C 092 Lowercase c with Cedilla
05D 093 Section Sign
07B 123 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
07C 124 Lowercase u with Grave Accent
07D 125 Lowercase e with Grave Accent
07E 126 Diaeresis (Trema, Umlaut)
DEC Multinational Character Sets
157
Table 33. DEC French Canadian Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
040 064 Lowercase a with Grave Accent
05B 091 Lowercase a with Circumflex Accent
05C 092 Lowercase c with Cedilla
05D 093 Lowercase e with Circumflex Accent
05E 094 Lowercase i with Circumflex Accent
060 096 Lowercase o with Circumflex Accent
07B 123 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
07C 124 Lowercase u with Grave Accent
07D 125 Lowercase e with Grave Accent
07E 126 Lowercase u with Circumflex Accent
Table 34. German Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
040 064 Section Sign
05B 091 Uppercase A with Umlaut
05C 092 Uppercase O with Umlaut
05D 093 Uppercase U with Umlaut
07B 123 Lowercase a with Umlaut
07C 124 Lowercase o with Umlaut
07D 125 Lowercase u with Umlaut
07E 126 Sharp S
Table 35. Italian Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
023 035 Pound Sign
040 064 Section Sign
05B 091 Degree Sign
05C 092 Lowercase c with Cedilla
05D 093 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
060 096 Lowercase u with Grave Accent
07B 123 Lowercase a with Grave Accent
07C 124 Lowercase o with Grave Accent
07D 125 Lowercase e with Grave Accent
07E 126 Lowercase i with Grave Accent
158
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 36. JIS Roman Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
05C 092 Yen Sign
Table 37. DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
040 035 Uppercase A with Umlaut
05B 091 Uppercase AE Diphthong
05C 092 Uppercase O with Slash
05D 093 Uppercase A with Ring
05E 094 Uppercase U with Umlaut
060 096 Lowercase a with Umlaut
07B 123 Lowercase ae Diphthong
07C 124 Lowercase o with Slash
07D 125 Lowercase a with Ring
07E 126 Lowercase u with Umlaut
Table 38. Spanish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
023 035 Pound Sign
040 064 Section Sign
05B 091 Inverted Exclamation Mark
05C 092 Uppercase N with Tilde
05D 093 Inverted Question Mark
07B 123 Degree Sign
07C 124 Lowercase n with Tilde
07D 125 Lowercase c with Cedilla
DEC Multinational Character Sets
159
Table 39. DEC Swedish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
040 064 Uppercase E with Acute Accent
05B 091 Uppercase A with Umlaut
05C 092 Uppercase O with Umlaut
05D 093 Uppercase A with Ring
05E 094 Uppercase U with Umlaut
060 096 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
07B 123 Lowercase a with Umlaut
07C 124 Lowercase o with Umlaut
07D 125 Lowercase a with Ring
07E 126 Lowercase u with Umlaut
Table 40. DEC Swiss Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
023 035 Lowercase u with Grave Accent
040 064 Lowercase a with Grave Accent
05B 091 Lowercase e with Acute Accent
05C 092 Lowercase c with Cedilla
05D 093 Lowercase e with Circumflex Accent
05E 094 Lowercase i with Circumflex Accent
05F 095 Lowercase e with Grave Accent
060 096 Lowercase o with Circumflex Accent
07B 123 Lowercase a with Umlaut Mark
07C 124 Lowercase o with Umlaut Mark
07D 125 Lowercase u with Umlaut Mark
07E 126 Lowercase u with Circumflex Accent
160
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 41. DEC Portuguese Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
05B 091 Uppercase A with Tilde
05C 092 Uppercase C with Cedilla
05D 093 Uppercase O with Tilde
07B 123 Lowercase a with Tilde
07C 124 Lowercase c with Cedilla
07D 125 Lowercase o with Tilde
Table 42. ISO Norwegian/Danish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
05B 091 Uppercase AE Diphthong
05C 092 Uppercase O with Slash
05D 093 Uppercase A with Ring
07B 123 Lowercase ae Diphthong
07C 124 Lowercase o with Slash
07D 125 Lowercase a with Ring
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
161
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
The printer can print sixteen character sets in addition to the OCR-A, OCR-B,
U.S. ASCII and DEC multinational character sets. These are:
•ISO Cyrillic
•ISO Greek
•ISO Hebrew
•ISO Latin 1
•ISO Latin 2
•ISO Latin 5
•ISO Latin 9
•ISO Katakana
•DEC Supplemental
•VT100 Graphics
•DEC Technical
•7-Bit Hebrew
•7-Bit Turkish
•Greek Supplemental
•Hebrew Supplemental
•Turkish Supplemental
The Numeric Character listings for each character set follow. Appendix A
provides graphic representations of the character set matrices.
NOTE: The Katakana character set is available only in DP font 10 CPI pitch,
and NLQ font 10 CPI pitch.
The DECAUPSS sequence (page 101) may be used to assign the following
character sets to the User Reference Supplemental set:
•DEC Supplemental, ISO Latin-1 Supplemental, ISO Latin-Hebrew
Supplemental, DEC Technical, ISO Latin-Greek Supplemental,
ISO Latin 9
162
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
ISO Character Sets
Table 43. ISO Cyrillic Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Uppercase Io
22 34 Uppercase Dje
23 35 Uppercase Gje
24 36 Uppercase Ie
25 37 Uppercase Dze
26 38 Uppercase I
27 39 Uppercase Yi
28 40 Uppercase Je
29 41 Uppercase Lje
2A 42 Uppercase Nje
2B 43 Uppercase Chje
2C 44 Uppercase Kje
2D 45 Space
2E 46 Uppercase short u
2F 47 Uppercase Dze
30 48 Uppercase A
31 49 Uppercase Be
32 50 Uppercase Ve
33 51 Uppercase Ghe
34 52 Uppercase De
35 53 Uppercase Ie
36 54 Uppercase Zhe
37 55 Uppercase Ze
38 56 Uppercase I
39 57 Uppercase I Kratkoe
3A 58 Uppercase Ka
3B 59 Uppercase El
3C 60 Uppercase Em
3D 61 Uppercase En
3E 62 Uppercase O
3F 63 Uppercase Pe
40 64 Uppercase Er
41 65 Uppercase Es
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
163
42 66 Uppercase Te
43 67 Uppercase U
44 68 Uppercase Ef
45 69 Uppercase Ha
46 70 Uppercase Tse
47 71 Uppercase Che
48 72 Uppercase Sha
49 73 Uppercase Shcha
4A 74 Uppercase Hard Sign
4B 75 Uppercase Yeru
4C 76 Uppercase Soft Sign
4D 77 Uppercase E
4E 78 Uppercase Yu
4F 79 Uppercase Ya
50 80 Lowercase A
51 81 Lowercase Be
52 82 Lowercase Ve
53 83 Lowercase Ghe
54 84 Lowercase De
55 85 Lowercase Ie
56 86 Lowercase Zhe
57 87 Lowercase Ze
58 88 Lowercase I
59 89 Lowercase I Kratkoe
5A 90 Lowercase Ka
5B 91 Lowercase El
5C 92 Lowercase Em
5D 93 Lowercase En
5E 94 Lowercase O
5F 95 Lowercase Pe
60 96 Lowercase Er
61 97 Lowercase Es
62 98 Lowercase Te
63 99 Lowercase U
Table 43. ISO Cyrillic Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
164
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
64 100 Lowercase Ef
65 101 Lowercase Ha
66 102 Lowercase Tse
67 103 Lowercase Che
68 104 Lowercase Sha
69 105 Lowercase Shcha
6A 106 Lowercase Hard Sign
6B 107 Lowercase Yeru
6C 108 Lowercase Soft Sign
6D 109 Lowercase E
6E 110 Lowercase Yu
6F 111 Lowercase Ya
70 112 Number Acronym
71 113 Lowercase Io
72 114 Lowercase Dje
73 115 Lowercase Gje
74 116 Lowercase Ie
75 117 Lowercase Dze
76 118 Lowercase I
77 119 Lowercase Yi
78 120 Lowercase Je
79 121 Lowercase Lje
7A 122 Lowercase Nje
7B 123 Lowercase Chje
7C 124 Lowercase Kje
7D 125 Section Sign
7E 126 Lowercase Short u
7F 127 Lowercase Dze
Table 43. ISO Cyrillic Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
165
Table 44. ISO Greek Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Grave Mark
22 34 Single Quotation Mark
23 35 Pound Sign
24-25 36-37 Space
26 38 Broken Bar
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 Diaeresis
29 41 Copyright
2A 42 Space
2B 43 Left Angle Quotation Mark
2C 44 Not Sign
2D-2E 45-46 Space
2F 47 Horizontal Bar
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus or Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript Two
33 51 Superscript Three
34 52 Rough
35 53 Diaeresis Accent Mark
36 54 Uppercase A with Rough
37 55 Small Dot
38 56 Uppercase Epsilon with Rough
39 57 Uppercase Eta with Rough
3A 58 Uppercase Iota with Rough
3B 59 Right Angle Quotation Mark
3C 60 Uppercase Omicron with Rough
3D 61 Fraction One-Half
3E 62 Uppercase Upsilon with Rough
3F 63 Uppercase Omaga with Rough
40 64 Lowercase Iota with Rough & Diaeresis
41 65 Uppercase Alpha
42 66 Uppercase Beta
43 67 Uppercase Gamma
166
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
44 68 Uppercase Delta
45 69 Uppercase Epsilon
46 70 Uppercase Zeta
47 71 Uppercase Eta
48 72 Uppercase Theta
49 73 Uppercase Iota
4A 74 Uppercase Kappa
4B 75 Uppercase Lamda
4C 76 Uppercase Mu
4D 77 Uppercase Nu
4E 78 Uppercase Ksi
4F 79 Uppercase Omicron
50 80 Uppercase Pi
51 81 Uppercase Rho
52 82 Space
53 83 Uppercase Sigma
54 84 Uppercase Tau
55 85 Uppercase Upsilon
56 86 Uppercase Phi
57 87 Uppercase Khi
58 88 Uppercase Psi
59 89 Uppercase Omega
5A 90 Uppercase I with Diaeresis
5B 91 Uppercase Upsilon with Diaeresis
5C 92 Lowercase Alpha with Rough
5D 93 Lowercase Epsilon with Rough
5E 94 Lowercase Eta with Rough
5F 95 Lowercase Iota with Rough
60 96 Lowercase Epsilon with Umlaut and Rough
61 97 Lowercase Alpha
62 98 Lowercase Beta
63 99 Lowercase Gamma
64 100 Lowercase Delta
65 101 Lowercase Epsilon
Table 44. ISO Greek Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
167
66 102 Lowercase Zeta
67 103 Lowercase Eta
68 104 Lowercase Theta
69 105 Lowercase Iota
6A 106 Lowercase Kappa
6B 107 Lowercase Lambda
6C 108 Lowercase Mu
6D 109 Lowercase Nu
6E 110 Lowercase Ksi
6F 111 Lowercase Omicron
70 112 Lowercase Pi
71 113 Lowercase Rho
72 114 Lowercase Terminal Sign
73 115 Lowercase Sigma
74 116 Lowercase Tau
75 117 Lowercase Upsilon
76 118 Lowercase Phi
77 119 Lowercase Khi
78 120 Lowercase Psi
79 121 Lowercase Omega
7A 122 Lowercase Iota with Y with Diaeresis
7B 123 Lowercase Upsilon with Diaeresis
7C 124 Lowercase Omicron with Rough
7D 125 Lowercase Upsilon with Rough
7E 126 Lowercase Omega with Rough
7F 127 Space
Table 44. ISO Greek Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
168
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 45. ISO Hebrew Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Space
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Currency Sign
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Broken Bar
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 Diaeresis
29 41 Copyright Symbol
2A 42 Multiply Sign
2B 43 Left Angle Quote
2C 44 Not Sign
2D 45 Space
2E 46 Registered Trade Mark
2F 47 Line Above
30 48 Degree Symbol
31 49 Plus or Minus
32 50 Superscript Two
33 51 Superscript Three
34 52 Single Quote
35 53 Lowercase Mu
36 54 Paragraph Sign
37 55 Small Dot
38 56 Cedilla
39 57 Superscript One
3A 58 Divide Sign
3B 59 Right Angle Quote
3C 60 Fraction One-Quarter
3D 61 Fraction One-Half
3E 62 Fraction Three-Quarters
3F 63 Space
40-5E 64-94 Space
5F 95 Double Low Line
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
169
60 96 Aleph
61 97 Bet
62 98 Gimel
63 99 Dalet
64 100 He
65 101 Waw
66 102 Zain
67 103 Chet
68 104 Tet
69 105 Yod
6A 106 Kaph with Terminal
6B 107 Kaph
6C 108 Lamed
6D 109 Mem with Terminal
6E 110 Mem
6F 111 Nun with Terminal
70 112 Nun
71 113 Samech
72 114 Ayin
73 115 Pe with Terminal
74 116 Pe
75 117 Zade with Terminal
76 118 Zade
77 119 Qoph
78 120 Resh
79 121 Shin
7A 122 Taw
7B-7F 123-127 Space
Table 45. ISO Hebrew Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
170
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 46. ISO Latin 2 Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Uppercase A with Ogonek
22 34 Breve
23 35 Uppercase L with Bar
24 36 Currency Sign
25 37 Uppercase L with Caron
26 38 Uppercase S with Acute
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 Diaeresis
29 41 Uppercase S with Caron
2A 42 Uppercase S with Cedilla
2B 43 Uppercase T with Caron
2C 44 Uppercase Z with Acute
2D 45 Space
2E 46 Uppercase Z with Caron
2F 47 Uppercase Z with Dot
30 48 Degree
31 49 Lowercase A with Ogonek
32 50 Ogonek
33 51 Lowercase L with Bar
34 52 Acute Accent
35 53 Lowercase L with Caron
36 54 Lowercase S with Acute
37 55 Caron Mark
38 56 Cedilla
39 57 Lowercase S with Caron
3A 58 Lowercase S with Cedilla
3B 59 Lowercase T with Caron
3C 60 Lowercase Z with Acute
3D 61 D with Acute Accent
3E 62 Lowercase Z with Caron
3F 63 Lowercase Z with Dot
40 64 Uppercase R with Acute
41 65 Uppercase A with Acute
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
171
42 66 Uppercase A with Circumflex
43 67 Uppercase A with Breve
44 68 Uppercase A with Diaeresis
45 69 Uppercase L with Acute
46 70 Uppercase C with Acute
47 71 Uppercase C with Cedilla
48 72 Uppercase C with Caron
49 73 Uppercase E with Acute
4A 74 Uppercase E with Ogonek
4B 75 Uppercase E with Diaeresis
4C 76 Uppercase E with Caron
4D 77 Uppercase I with Acute
4E 78 Uppercase I with Circumflex
4F 79 Uppercase D with Caron
50 80 Uppercase D with Stroke
51 81 Uppercase N with Acute
52 82 Uppercase N with Caron
53 83 Uppercase O with Acute
54 84 Uppercase O with Circumflex
55 85 Uppercase O with Acute
56 86 Uppercase O with Diaeresis
57 87 Multiply Sign
58 88 Uppercase R with Caron
59 89 Uppercase U with Ring Above
5A 90 Uppercase U with Acute
5B 91 Uppercase U with Acute
5C 92 Uppercase U with Diaeresis
5D 93 Uppercase Y with Acute
5E 94 Uppercase T with Cedilla
5F 95 Sharp S
60 96 Lowercase R with Acute
61 97 Lowercase A with Acute
62 98 Lowercase A with Circumflex
63 99 Lowercase A with Breve
Table 46. ISO Latin 2 Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
172
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
64 100 Lowercase A with Diaeresis
65 101 Lowercase L with Acute
66 102 Lowercase C with Acute
67 103 Lowercase C with Cedilla
68 104 Lowercase C with Caron
69 105 Lowercase E with Acute
6A 106 Lowercase E with Ogonek
6B 107 Lowercase E with Diaeresis
6C 108 Lowercase E with Circumflex
6D 109 Lowercase I with Acute
6E 110 Lowercase I with Circumflex
6F 111 Lowercase D with Caron
70 112 Lowercase D with Stroke
71 113 Lowercase N with Acute
72 114 Lowercase N with Caron
73 115 Lowercase O with Acute
74 116 Lowercase O with Circumflex
75 117 Lowercase OD with Acute
76 118 Lowercase O with Diaeresis
77 119 Divide Sign
78 120 Lowercase R with Caron
79 121 Lowercase U with Ring Above
7A 122 Lowercase U with Acute
7B 123 Lowercase UD with Acute
7C 124 Lowercase U with Diaeresis
7D 125 Lowercase Y with Acute
7E 126 Lowercase T with Cedilla
7F 127 Superscript Dot
Table 46. ISO Latin 2 Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
173
Table 47. ISO Latin 5 Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Inverted Exclamation Mark
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Currency Sign
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Broken Bar
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 Diaeresis
29 41 Copyright Symbol
2A 42 Feminine Ordinal Indicator
2B 43 Left Angle Quotation Mark
2C 44 Not Sign
2D 45 Space
2E 46 Registered Trade Mark
2F 47 Macron
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus or Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript Two
33 51 Superscript Three
34 52 Single Quotation Mark
35 53 Lowercase Mu
36 54 Paragraph Sign
37 55 Small Dot
38 56 Cedilla
39 57 Superscript One
3A 58 Masculine Ordinal Indicator
3B 59 Right Angle Quotation Mark
3C 60 Fraction One-Quarter
3D 61 Fraction One-Half
3E 62 Fraction Three-Quarters
3F 63 Inverted Question Mark
40 64 Uppercase A with Grave
41 65 Uppercase A with Actue
174
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
42 66 Uppercase A with Circumflex
43 67 Uppercase A with Tilde
44 68 Uppercase A with Diaeresis
45 69 Uppercase A with Ring
46 70 Uppercase AE Diphthong
47 71 Uppercase C with Cedilla
48 72 Uppercase E with Grave
49 73 Uppercase E with Actue
4A 74 Uppercase E with Circumflex
4B 75 Uppercase E with Diaeresis
4C 76 Uppercase I with Grave Mark
4D 77 Uppercase I with Acute
4E 78 Uppercase I with Circumflex
4F 79 Uppercase I with Diaeresis
50 80 Uppercase G with Breve
51 81 Uppercase N with Tilde
52 82 Uppercase O with Grave
53 83 Uppercase O with Acute
54 84 Uppercase O with Circumflex
55 85 Uppercase O with Tilde
56 86 Uppercase O with Diaeresis
57 87 Multiply Sign
58 88 Uppercase O with Slash
59 89 Uppercase U with Grave
5A 90 Uppercase U with Acute
5B 91 Uppercase U with Circumflex
5C 92 Uppercase U with Diaeresis
5D 93 Uppercase I with Ring Above
5E 94 Uppercase S with Cedilla
5F 95 Sharp S
60 96 Lowercase A with Grave
61 97 Lowercase A with Acute
62 98 Lowercase A with Circumflex
63 99 Lowercase A with Tilde
Table 47. ISO Latin 5 Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
175
64 100 Lowercase A with Diaeresis
65 101 Lowercase A with Ring Above
66 102 Lowercase AE Diphthong
67 103 Lowercase C with Cedilla
68 104 Lowercase E with Grave
69 105 Lowercase E with Acute
6A 106 Lowercase E with Circumflex
6B 107 Lowercase E with Diaeresis
6C 108 Lowercase I with Grave
6D 109 Lowercase I with Acute
6E 110 Lowercase I with Circumflex
6F 111 Lowercase I with Diaeresis
70 112 Lowecase G with Breve
71 113 Lowercase N with Tilde
72 114 Lowercase O with Grave
73 115 Lowercase O with Acute
74 116 Lowercase O with Circumflex
75 117 Lowercase O with Tilde
76 118 Lowercase O with Diaeresis
77 119 Divide Sign
78 120 Lowercase O with Slash
79 121 Lowercase U with Grave
7A 122 Lowercase U with Acute
7B 123 Lowercase U with Circumflex
7C 124 Lowercase U with Diaeresis
7D 125 Lowercase I
7E 126 Lowercase S with Cedilla
7F 127 Uppercase Y with Diaeresis
Table 47. ISO Latin 5 Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
176
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
DEC Supplemental Character Set
The DEC Supplemental Character Set consists of graphic alphabetical
symbols not included in the ASCII Character Set. Character positions
identified as “reserved for future use” print the error character (reverse
question mark).
Table 48 gives the 7-bit code for each character. The equivalent 8-bit code is
obtained by adding octal 200 or hex 80 to the 7-bit code.
Table 48. DEC Supplemental Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Inverted Exclamation Mark
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Reserved for Future Use
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Reserved for Future Use
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 General Currency Sign
29 41 Copyright Sign
2A 42 Feminine Ordinal Indicator
2B 43 Angle Quotation Mark - Left
2C-2F 44-47 Reserved for Future Use
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus/Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript 2
33 51 Superscript 3
34 52 Reserved for Future Use
35 53 Micro Sign
36 54 Paragraph Sign (Pilcrow)
37 55 Middle Dot
38 56 Reserved for Future Use
39 57 Superscript 1
3A 58 Masculine Ordinal Indicator
3B 59 Angle Quotation Mark (Right)
3C 60 Fraction One-Quarter Mark
3D 61 Fraction One-Quarter Mark
3E 62 Reserved for Future Use
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
177
3F 63 Inverted Question Mark
40 64 Uppercase A with Grave Accent
41 65 Uppercase A with Acute Accent
42 66 Uppercase A with Circumflex Accent
43 67 Uppercase A with Tilde
44 68 Uppercase A with Diaeresis
45 69 Uppercase A with Ring
46 70 Uppercase AE Diphthong
47 71 Uppercase C with Cedilla
48 72 Uppercase E with Grave
49 73 Uppercase E with Acute
4A 74 Uppercase E with Circumflex Accent
4B 75 Uppercase E with Diaeresis
4C 76 Uppercase I with Grave
4D 77 Uppercase I with Acute
4E 78 Uppercase I with Circumflex Accent
4F 79 Uppercase I with Diaeresis
50 80 Reserved for Future Use
51 81 Uppercase N with Tilde
52 82 Uppercase O with Grave
53 83 Uppercase O with Acute
54 84 Uppercase O with Circumflex Accent
55 85 Uppercase O with Tilde
56 86 Uppercase O with Diaeresis
57 87 Uppercase OE Ligature
58 88 Uppercase O with Slash
59 89 Uppercase O with Grave
5A 90 Uppercase U with Acute
5B 91 Uppercase U with Circumflex Accent
5C 92 Uppercase U with Diaeresis or Diaeresis
5D 93 Uppercase Y with Diaeresis
5E 94 Reserved for Future Use
5F 95 Sharp S
60 96 Lowercase a with Grave
Table 48. DEC Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
178
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
61 97 Lowercase a with Acute
62 98 Lowercase a with Circumflex Accent
63 99 Lowercase a with Tilde
64 100 Lowercase a with Diaeresis
65 101 Lowercase a with Ring
66 102 Lowercase ae Diphthong
67 103 Lowercase c with Cedilla
68 104 Lowercase e with Grave
69 105 Lowercase e with Acute
6A 106 Lowercase e with Circumflex Accent
6B 107 Lowercase e with Diaeresis
6C 108 Lowercase i with Grave
6D 109 Lowercase i with Acute
6E 110 Lowercase i with Circumflex Accent
6F 111 Lowercase i with Diaeresis
70 112 Reserved for Future Use
71 113 Lowercase n with Tilde
72 114 Lowercase o with Grave
73 115 Lowercase o with Acute
74 116 Lowercase o with Circumflex Accent
75 117 Lowercase o with Tilde
76 118 Lowercase o with Diaeresis
77 119 Lowercase oe Ligature
78 120 Lowercase o with Slash
79 121 Lowercase u with Grave
7A 122 Lowercase u with Acute
7B 123 Lowercase u with Circumflex Accent
7C 124 Lowercase u with Diaeresis
7D 125 Lowercase y with Diaeresis
7E 126 Reserved for Future Use
7F 127 Delete
Table 48. DEC Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
179
VT100 Graphics Character Set
The VT100 Graphics Character Set contains ASCII and special graphic
symbols. Several characters in this set that are also found in the DEC
Technical Character Set or the DEC Supplemental Character Set. Line
drawing characters are identified in Table 49 by an asterisk after the hex
value.
NOTE: This character set is available in DP font 10 CPI pitch only.
NOTE: *Denotes those characters used for line drawing.
1Denotes characters also found in the DEC Technical Character Set
2Denotes characters also found in the DEC Supplemental Character
Set
Table 49. VT100 Graphics Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Exclamation Point
22 34 Double Quotation Mark
23 35 Number Sign
24 36 Dollar Sign
25 37 Percent Sign
26 38 Ampersand
27 39 Single Quotation Mark
28 40 Open Parenthesis
29 41 Closed Parenthesis
2A 42 Asterisk
2B 43 Plus
2C 44 Comma
2D 45 Hyphen or Minus
2E 46 Period or Decimal Point
2F 47 Slash
30 48 Zero (Not Slashed)
31 49 One
32 50 Two
33 51 Three
34 52 Four
35 53 Five
36 54 Six
37 55 Seven
38 56 Eight
180
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
39 57 Nine
3A 58 Colon
3B 59 Semicolon
3C 60 Less Than Symbol
3D 61 Equals Symbol
3E 62 Greater Than Symbol
3F 63 Question Mark
40 64 At Sign
41 65 Uppercase A
42 66 Uppercase B
43 67 Uppercase C
44 68 Uppercase D
45 69 Uppercase E
46 70 Uppercase F
47 71 Uppercase G
48 72 Uppercase H
49 73 Uppercase I
4A 74 Uppercase J
4B 75 Uppercase K
4C 76 Uppercase L
4D 77 Uppercase M
4E 78 Uppercase N
4F 79 Uppercase O
50 80 Uppercase P
51 81 Uppercase Q
52 82 Uppercase R
53 83 Uppercase S
54 84 Uppercase T
55 85 Uppercase U
56 86 Uppercase V
57 87 Uppercase W
58 88 Uppercase X
59 89 Uppercase Y
5A 90 Uppercase Z
Table 49. VT100 Graphics Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
181
5B 91 Open Bracket
5C 92 Backslash
5D 93 Closed Bracket
5E 94 Circumflex
5F* 95 Space
60* 96 Solid Diamond
61* 97 Solid Box
62* 98 Horizontal Tab
63* 99 Form Feed
64* 100 Carriage Return
65* 101 Line Feed
66* 102 Degree Symbol2
67* 103 Plus/Minus Sign2
68* 104 New Line
69* 105 Vertical Tab
6A* 106 Graphics Bar Lower Right Corner
6B* 107 Graphics Bar Upper Right Corner
6C* 108 Graphics Bar Upper Left Corner
6D* 109 Graphics Bar Lower Left Corner
6E* 110 Crossing Lines
6F* 111 Horizontal Line, Scan 1
70* 112 Horizontal Line, Scan 3
71* 113 Horizontal Line, Scan 5
72* 114 Horizontal Line, Scan 7
73* 115 Horizontal Line, Scan 9
74* 116 Left T
75* 117 Right T
76* 118 Bottom T
77* 119 Top T
78* 120 Vertical Bar
79* 121 Less Than or Equal To Sign1
7A* 122 Greater Than or Equal To Sign1
7B* 123 Lowercase Greek Letter Pi1
7C* 124 Not Equal Sign1
Table 49. VT100 Graphics Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
182
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
DEC Technical Character Set
The DEC Technical Character Set contains Greek letters, mathematical
symbols, and logical symbols. Additionally, it contains characters that may be
used to construct larger mathematical symbols on character cell devices,
such as large integral and summation signs. Select this character set via the
SCS control sequence, as described on page 99.
The technical character set is output to the terminal via software that
responds to the ANSI/ISO Single Shift 3 (SS3) non-locking shift control
function. SS3 is already terminal-resident--just enter the hex value from Table
50 to produce the appropriate character. The set has no duplicate ASCII or
DEC Supplemental characters. Eleven positions are reserved for future
standardization, including the corners, hex 20 and hex 7F.
The printer conforms to the following:
•Responds to the escape sequence that determines the DEC Technical
Character Set. The printer cannot designate or invoke the DEC Technical
Character Set by default.
•Positions reserved for future standardization in the DEC technical set are
imaged as the error character (reverse question mark).
•Component characters are imaged so that adjacent component
characters form connected lines at all pitches.
7D* 125 Pound Sign2
7E* 126 Big Dot2
7F 127 Delete
Table 49. VT100 Graphics Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
183
Table 50. DEC Technical Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Greek:
44 68 Uppercase Delta
46 70 Uppercase Phi
47 71 Uppercase Gamma
4A 74 Uppercase Theta
4C 76 Uppercase Lambda
50 80 Uppercase Pi
51 81 Uppercase Psi
53 83 Uppercase Sigma
57 87 Uppercase Omega
58 88 Uppercase Ksi
59 89 Uppercase Upsilon
61 97 Lowercase Alpha
62 98 Lowercase Beta
63 99 Lowercase Gamma
64 100 Lowercase Delta
65 101 Lowercase Epsilon
66 102 Lowercase Phi
67 103 Lowercase Gamma
68 104 Lowercase Eta
69 105 Lowercase Iota
6A 106 Lowercase Theta
6B 107 Lowercase Kappa
6C 108 Lowercase Lambda
6E 110 Lowercase Nu
70 112 Lowercase Pi
71 113 Lowercase Psi
72 114 Lowercase Rho
73 115 Lowercase Sigma
74 116 Lowercase Tau
77 119 Lowercase Omega
78 120 Lowercase Ksi
79 121 Lowercase Upsilon
7A 122 Lowercase Zeta
184
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Mathematical:
3C 60 Less Than or Equal To
3D 61 Not Equal
3E 62 Greater Than or Equal To
3F 63 Integral
41 65 Variation or Proportional To1
42 66 Infinity
43 67 Division or Divided By
45 69 Nabla or Del
48 72 Is Approximate To
49 73 Similar or Equal To
4B 75 Times or Cross Product
56 86 Radical
6F 111 Partial Derivative
76 118 Function
7B 123 Left Arrow
7C 124 Upward Arrow
7D 125 Right Arrow
7E 126 Downward Arrow
Logic:
40 64 Therefore
4D 77 If and Only If
4E 78 Implies
4F 79 Identical To
5A 90 Is Included In
5B 91 Includes
5C 92 Intersection
5D 93 Union
5E 94 Logical And
5F 95 Logical Or
60 96 Logical Not
Table 50. DEC Technical Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
185
Table 51. ISO Katakana Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
21 33 Katakana full stop
22 34 Katakana opening bracket
23 35 Katakana closing bracket
24 36 Katakana comma
25 37 Katakana conjunctive symbol
26 38 Katakana wo
27 39 Katakana small a
28 40 Katakana small i
29 41 Katakana small u
2A 42 Katakana small e
2B 43 Katakana small o
2C 44 Katakana small ya
2D 45 Katakana small yu
2E 46 Katakana small yo
2F 47 Katakana small tsu
30 48 Katakana prolonged sound symbol
31 49 Katakana a
32 50 Katakana i
33 51 Katakana u
34 52 Katakana e
35 53 Katakana o
36 54 Katakana ka
37 55 Katakana ki
38 56 Katakana ku
39 57 Katakana ke
3A 58 Katakana ko
3B 59 Katakana sa
3C 60 Katakana shi
3D 61 Katakana su
3E 62 Katakana se
3F 63 Katakana so
40 64 Katakana ta
41 65 Katakana chi
186
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
42 66 Katakana tsu
43 67 Katakana te
44 68 Katakana to
45 69 Katakana na
46 70 Katakana ni
47 71 Katakana nu
48 72 Katakana ne
49 73 Katakana no
4A 74 Katakana ha
4B 75 Katakana hi
4C 76 Katakana fu
4D 77 Katakana he
4E 78 Katakana ho
4F 79 Katakana ma
50 80 Katakana mi
51 81 Katakana mu
52 82 Katakana me
53 83 Katakana mo
54 84 Katakana ya
55 85 Katakana yu
56 86 Katakana yo
57 87 Katakana ra
58 88 Katakana ri
59 89 Katakana ru
5A 90 Katakana re
5B 91 Katakana ro
5C 92 Katakana wa
5D 93 Katakana n(m)
5E 94 Katakana voiced sound symbol
5F 95 Katakana semi-voiced sound symbol
60-7E 96-126 (Reserved for future use)
Table 51. ISO Katakana Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
187
Table 52. 7-Bit Hebrew Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Exclamation Point
22 34 Quotation Marks
23 35 Number Sign
24 36 Dollar Sign
25 37 Percent Sign
26 38 Ampersand
27 39 Apostrophe
28 40 Open Parenthesis
29 41 Closed Parenthesis
2A 42 Asterisk
2B 43 Plus
2C 44 Comma
2D 45 Hyphen or Minus
2E 46 Period or Decimal Point
2F 47 Slash
30 48 Zero (Not Slashed)
31 49 One
32 50 Two
33 51 Three
34 52 Four
35 53 Five
36 54 Six
37 55 Seven
38 56 Eight
39 57 Nine
3A 58 Colon
3B 59 Semicolon
3C 60 Less Than Symbol
3D 61 Equals Symbol
3E 62 Greater Than Symbol
3F 63 Question Mark
40 64 At Sign
188
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
41 65 Uppercase A
42 66 Uppercase B
43 67 Uppercase C
44 68 Uppercase D
45 69 Uppercase E
46 70 Uppercase F
47 71 Uppercase G
48 72 Uppercase H
49 73 Uppercase I
4A 74 Uppercase J
4B 75 Uppercase K
4C 76 Uppercase L
4D 77 Uppercase M
4E 78 Uppercase N
4F 79 Uppercase O
50 80 Uppercase P
51 81 Uppercase Q
52 82 Uppercase R
53 83 Uppercase S
54 84 Uppercase T
55 85 Uppercase U
56 86 Uppercase V
57 87 Uppercase W
58 88 Uppercase X
59 89 Uppercase Y
5A 90 Uppercase Z
5B 91 Open Bracket
5C 92 Backslash
5D 93 Closed Bracket
5E 94 Circumflex
5F 95 Underline
60 96 Hebrew letter ALEPH
61 97 Hebrew letter BETH
62 98 Hebrew letter GIMMEL
Table 52. 7-Bit Hebrew Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
189
63 99 Hebrew letter DALETH
64 100 Hebrew letter HE
65 101 Hebrew letter WAW
66 102 Hebrew letter ZAYIN
67 103 Hebrew letter HET
68 104 Hebrew letter TETH
69 105 Hebrew letter YOD
6A 106 Hebrew letter KAPH (Final Form)
6B 107 Hebrew letter KAPH
6C 108 Hebrew letter LAMED
6D 109 Hebrew letter MEM (Final Form)
6E 110 Hebrew letter MEM
6F 111 Hebrew letter NUN (Final Form)
70 112 Hebrew letter NUN
71 113 Hebrew letter SAMEKH
72 114 Hebrew letter A’YIN
73 115 Hebrew letter PE (Final Form)
74 116 Hebrew letter PE
75 117 Hebrew letter ZADIK (Final Form)
76 118 Hebrew letter ZADIK
77 119 Hebrew letter KOF/KUF
78 120 Hebrew letter RESH
79 121 Hebrew letter SHIN/SIN
7A 122 Hebrew letter TAF
7B 123 Open Brace
7C 124 Solid Vertical Line
7D 125 Closed Brace
7E 126 Tilde
7F 127 Delete
Table 52. 7-Bit Hebrew Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
190
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 53. 7-Bit Turkish Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Small Letter i Without Dot
22 34 Quotation Marks
23 35 Number Sign
24 36 Dollar Sign
25 37 Percent Sign
26 38 Small Letter g With Breve
27 39 Apostrophe
28 40 Open Parenthesis
29 41 Closed Parenthesis
2A 42 Asterisk
2B 43 Plus
2C 44 Comma
2D 45 Hyphen or Minus
2E 46 Period or Decimal Point
2F 47 Slash
30 48 Zero (Not Slashed)
31 49 One
32 50 Two
33 51 Three
34 52 Four
35 53 Five
36 54 Six
37 55 Seven
38 56 Eight
39 57 Nine
3A 58 Colon
3B 59 Semicolon
3C 60 Less Than Symbol
3D 61 Equals Symbol
3E 62 Greater Than Symbol
3F 63 Question Mark
40 64 Capital Letter I With Dot Above
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
191
41 65 Uppercase A
42 66 Uppercase B
43 67 Uppercase C
44 68 Uppercase D
45 69 Uppercase E
46 70 Uppercase F
47 71 Uppercase G
48 72 Uppercase H
49 73 Uppercase I
4A 74 Uppercase J
4B 75 Uppercase K
4C 76 Uppercase L
4D 77 Uppercase M
4E 78 Uppercase N
4F 79 Uppercase O
50 80 Uppercase P
51 81 Uppercase Q
52 82 Uppercase R
53 83 Uppercase S
54 84 Uppercase T
55 85 Uppercase U
56 86 Uppercase V
57 87 Uppercase W
58 88 Uppercase X
59 89 Uppercase Y
5A 90 Uppercase Z
5B 91 Capital Letter S With Cedilla Below
5C 92 Capital Letter O With Diaeresis
5D 93 Capital Letter C With Cedilla Below
5E 94 Capital Letter U With Diaeresis
5F 95 Underline
60 96 Capital Letter G With Breve
61 97 Lowercase a
62 98 Lowercase b
Table 53. 7-Bit Turkish Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
192
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
63 99 Lowercase c
64 100 Lowercase d
65 101 Lowercase e
66 102 Lowercase f
67 103 Lowercase g
68 104 Lowercase h
69 105 Lowercase i
6A 106 Lowercase j
6B 107 Lowercase k
6C 108 Lowercase l
6D 109 Lowercase m
6E 110 Lowercase n
6F 111 Lowercase o
70 112 Lowercase p
71 113 Lowercase q
72 114 Lowercase r
73 115 Lowercase s
74 116 Lowercase t
75 117 Lowercase u
76 118 Lowercase v
77 119 Lowercase w
78 120 Lowercase x
79 121 Lowercase y
7A 122 Lowercase z
7B 123 Small Letter s With Cedilla Below
7C 124 Small Letter o With Diaeresis
7D 125 Small Letter c With Cedilla Below
7E 126 Small Letter u With Diaeresis
7F 127 Delete
Table 53. 7-Bit Turkish Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
193
Table 54. Greek Supplemental Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Reserved for Future Use
21 33 Inverted Exclamation Point
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Reserved for Future Use
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Reserved for Future Use
27 39 Paragraph Sign
28 40 General Currency Sign
29 41 Copyright Sign
2A 42 Feminine Ordinal Indicator
2B 43 Left Angle Quotation Mark
2C 44 Reserved for Future Use
2D 45 Reserved for Future Use
2E 46 Reserved for Future Use
2F 47 Reserved for Future Use
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus or Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript Two
33 51 Superscript Three
34 52 Reserved for Future Use
35 53 Micro Sign
36 54 Paragraph Sign, Pilcrow
37 55 Middle Dot (Ano Teleia)
38 56 Reserved for Future Use
39 57 Superscript 1
3A 58 Masculine Ordinal Indicator
3B 59 Right Angle Quotation Mark
3C 60 Fraction One Quarter
3D 61 Vulgar Fraction One-Half
3E 62 Reserved for Future Use
3F 63 Inverted Question Mark
40 64 Small Greek Letter Iota with Diaeresis
194
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
41 65 Capital Greek Letter Alpha
42 66 Capital Greek Letter Beta
43 67 Capital Greek Letter Gamma
44 68 Capital Greek Letter Delta
45 69 Capital Greek Letter Epsilon
46 70 Capital Greek Letter Zeta
47 71 Capital Greek Letter Eta
48 72 Capital Greek Letter Theta
49 73 Capital Greek Letter Iota
4A 74 Capital Greek Letter Kappa
4B 75 Capital Greek Letter Lamda
4C 76 Capital Greek Letter Mu
4D 77 Capital Greek Letter Nu
4E 78 Capital Greek Letter Ksi
4F 79 Capital Greek Letter Omicron
50 80 Reserved for Future Use
51 81 Capital Greek Letter Pi
52 82 Capital Greek Letter Rho
53 83 Capital Greek Letter Sigma
54 84 Capital Greek Letter Tau
55 85 Capital Greek Letter Upsilon
56 86 Capital Greek Letter Phi
57 87 Capital Greek Letter Khi
58 88 Capital Greek Letter Psi
59 89 Capital Greek Letter Omega
5A 90 Small Greek Letter Alpha with Accent
5B 91 Small Greek Letter Epsilon with Accent
5C 92 Small Greek Letter Eta with Accent
5D 93 Small Greek Letter Iota with Accent
5E 94 Reserved for Future Use
5F 95 Small Greek Letter Omicron with Accent
60 96 Small Greek Letter Upsilon with Diaeresis
61 97 Small Greek Letter Alpha
62 98 Small Greek Letter Beta
Table 54. Greek Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
195
63 99 Small Greek Letter Gamma
64 100 Small Greek Letter Delta
65 101 Small Greek Letter Epsilon
66 102 Small Greek Letter Zeta
67 103 Small Greek Letter Eta
68 104 Small Greek Letter Theta
69 105 Small Greek Letter Iota
6A 106 Small Greek Letter Kappa
6B 107 Small Greek Letter Lambda
6C 108 Small Greek Letter Mu
6D 109 Small Greek Letter Nu
6E 110 Small Greek Letter Ksi
6F 111 Small Greek Letter Omicron
70 112 Reserved for Future Use
71 113 Small Greek Letter Pi
72 114 Small Greek Letter Rho
73 115 Small Greek Letter Sigma
74 116 Small Greek Letter Tau
75 117 Small Greek Letter Upsilon
76 118 Small Greek Letter Phi
77 119 Small Greek Letter Khi
78 120 Small Greek Letter Psi
79 121 Small Greek Letter Omega
7A 122 Small Greek Letter Zeta
7B 123 Small Greek Letter Upsilon with Accent
7C 124 Small Greek Letter Omega with Accent
7D 125 Accent (Tonos)
7E 126 Reserved for Future Use
Table 54. Greek Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
196
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 55. Hebrew Supplemental Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Inverted Exclamation Mark
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Reserved for Future Use
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Reserved for Future Use
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 General Currency Sign
29 41 Copyright Sign
2A 42 Feminine Ordinal Indicator
2B 43 Left Angle Quotation Mark
2C-2F 44-47 Reserved for Future Use
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus or Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript Two
33 51 Superscript Three
34 52 Reserved for Future Use
35 53 Micro Sign
36 54 Paragraph Sign, Pilcrow
37 55 Middle Dot
38 56 Reserved for Future Use
39 57 Superscript 1
3A 58 Masculine Ordinal Indicator
3B 59 Right Angle Quotation Mark
3C 60 Fraction One - Quarter Mark
3D 61 Fraction One - Half Mark
3E 62 Reserved for Future Use
3F 63 Inverted Question Mark
40-5F 64-95 Reserved for Future Use
60 96 Hebrew letter ALEPH
61 97 Hebrew letter BETH
62 98 Hebrew letter GIMMEL
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
197
63 99 Hebrew letter DALETH
64 100 Hebrew letter HE
65 101 Hebrew letter WAW
66 102 Hebrew letter ZAYIN
67 103 Hebrew letter HET
68 104 Hebrew letter TETH
69 105 Hebrew letter YOD
6A 106 Hebrew letter KAPH (Final Form)
6B 107 Hebrew letter KAPH
6C 108 Hebrew letter LAMED
6D 109 Hebrew letter MEM (Final Form)
6E 110 Hebrew letter MEM
6F 111 Hebrew letter NUN (Final Form)
70 112 Hebrew letter NUN
71 113 Hebrew letter SAMEKH
72 114 Hebrew letter A’YIN
73 115 Hebrew letter PE (Final Form)
74 116 Hebrew letter PE
75 117 Hebrew letter ZADIK (Final Form)
76 118 Hebrew letter ZADIK
77 119 Hebrew letter KOF/KUF
78 120 Hebrew letter RESH
79 121 Hebrew letter SHIN/SIN
7A 122 Hebrew letter TAF
7B 123 Reserved for Future Use
7C 124 Reserved for Future Use
7D 125 Reserved for Future Use
7E 126 Reserved for Future Use
7F 127 Delete
Table 55. Hebrew Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
198
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Table 56. Turkish Supplemental Character Set
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
20 32 Space
21 33 Inverted Exclamation Mark
22 34 Cent Sign
23 35 Pound Sign
24 36 Reserved for Future Use
25 37 Yen Sign
26 38 Reserved for Future Use
27 39 Section Sign
28 40 General Currency Sign
29 41 Copyright Sign
2A 42 Feminine Ordinal Indicator
2B 43 Angle Quotation Mark - Left
2C 44 Reserved for Future Use
2D 45 Reserved for Future Use
2E 46 Capital Letter I With Dot Above
2F 47 Reserved for Future Use
30 48 Degree Sign
31 49 Plus/Minus Sign
32 50 Superscript 2
33 51 Superscript 3
34 52 Reserved for Future Use
35 53 Micro Sign
36 54 Paragraph Sign (Pilcrow)
37 55 Middle Dot
38 56 Reserved for Future Use
39 57 Superscript 1
3A 58 Masculine Ordinal Indicator
3B 59 Angle Quotation Mark (Right)
3C 60 Fraction One-Quarter Mark
3D 61 Fraction One-Quarter Mark
3E 62 Small Letter i Without Dot
3F 63 Inverted Question Mark
40 64 Uppercase A with Grave Accent
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
199
41 65 Uppercase A with Acute Accent
42 66 Uppercase A with Circumflex Accent
43 67 Uppercase A with Tilde
44 68 Uppercase A with Diaeresis
45 69 Uppercase A with Ring
46 70 Uppercase AE Diphthong
47 71 Uppercase C with Cedilla
48 72 Uppercase E with Grave
49 73 Uppercase E with Acute
4A 74 Uppercase E with Circumflex Accent
4B 75 Uppercase E with Diaeresis
4C 76 Uppercase I with Grave
4D 77 Uppercase I with Acute
4E 78 Uppercase I with Circumflex Accent
4F 79 Uppercase I with Diaeresis
50 80 Capital Letter G With Breve
51 81 Uppercase N with Tilde
52 82 Uppercase O with Grave
53 83 Uppercase O with Acute
54 84 Uppercase O with Circumflex Accent
55 85 Uppercase O with Tilde
56 86 Uppercase O with Diaeresis
57 87 Uppercase OE Ligature
58 88 Uppercase O with Slash
59 89 Uppercase O with Grave
5A 90 Uppercase U with Acute
5B 91 Uppercase U with Circumflex Accent
5C 92 Uppercase U with Diaeresis or Diaeresis
5D 93 Uppercase Y with Diaeresis
5E 94 Capital Letter S With Cedilla
5F 95 Sharp S
60 96 Lowercase a with Grave
61 97 Lowercase a with Acute
62 98 Lowercase a with Circumflex Accent
Table 56. Turkish Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
200
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
63 99 Lowercase a with Tilde
64 100 Lowercase a with Diaeresis
65 101 Lowercase a with Ring
66 102 Lowercase ae Diphthong
67 103 Lowercase c with Cedilla
68 104 Lowercase e with Grave
69 105 Lowercase e with Acute
6A 106 Lowercase e with Circumflex Accent
6B 107 Lowercase e with Diaeresis
6C 108 Lowercase i with Grave
6D 109 Lowercase i with Acute
6E 110 Lowercase i with Circumflex Accent
6F 111 Lowercase i with Diaeresis
70 112 Small Letter g With Breve
71 113 Lowercase n with Tilde
72 114 Lowercase o with Grave
73 115 Lowercase o with Acute
74 116 Lowercase o with Circumflex Accent
75 117 Lowercase o with Tilde
76 118 Lowercase o with Diaeresis
77 119 Lowercase oe Ligature
78 120 Lowercase o with Slash
79 121 Lowercase u with Grave
7A 122 Lowercase u with Acute
7B 123 Lowercase u with Circumflex Accent
7C 124 Lowercase u with Diaeresis
7D 125 Lowercase y with Diaeresis
7E 126 Small Letter s With Cedilla
7F 127 Delete
Table 56. Turkish Supplemental Character Set (continued)
Hex
Value Decimal
Code Symbol Name
Additional ISO and Special Character Sets
201
Building Large Mathematical Symbols
Table 57 shows how to build large mathematical symbols. The characters are
designed to connect to adjacent character cells at 10 cpi and 6 lpi to form
technical characters that can occupy several vertically adjacent and/or
horizontally adjacent character positions.
To use Table 57, find the character you want to build (along the top of the
table). On the left side of the table are various pieces of the characters
needed to create the whole. Follow the top row choice, say, Integral, all the
way down the table. Designate the hex value called out beside the symbol
names. For example, to build an oversize integral, you will need a top integral
(hex 24), bottom integral (hex 25), and vertical connector (hex 26).
Table 57. Component Characters
Symbol Name/
Hex Value Radical Integral Square
Bracket Curly
Bracket Parenthesis Summations
Left Radical 21 X
Top Left Radical 22 X
Horizontal
Connector 23 XX
Top Integral 24 X
Bottom Integral 25 X
Vertical Connector
26 XXXX X
Top Left Square
Bracket 27 X
Bottom Left Square
Bracket 28 X
Top Right Square
Bracket 29 X
Bottom Right
Square Bracket 2A X
Top Left
Parenthesis 2B XX
Bottom Left
Parenthesis 2C XX
Top Right
Parenthesis 2D XX
Bottom Right
Parenthesis 2E XX
Left Middle Curly
Brace 2F X
Right Middle Curly
Brace 30 X
Top Left Summation
31 X
202
Chapter 3 Selecting the Character Set and Language
Bottom Left
Summation 32 X
Top Vertical
Summation
Connector 33
X
Bottom Vertical
Summation
Connector 34
X
Top Right
Summation 35 X
Bottom Right
Summation 36 X
Right Middle
Summation 37 X
Table 57. Component Characters (continued)
Symbol Name/
Hex Value Radical Integral Square
Bracket Curly
Bracket Parenthesis Summations
203
4Bar Codes
Bar Codes
A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters that can be
read by a scanning device. This chapter describes how to print bar codes
using LG emulation control codes.
In LG emulation, three escape sequences enable the printer to print bar
codes. One escape sequence sets the bar code parameters, another starts
bar code production, and the third sequence stops bar code printing.
Select Bar Codes Attributes Sequence (DECSBCA)
ASCII Code: ESC [ P1; P2;...P9'q
Hex Code: 1B 5B P1 3B P2 3B...P9 27 71
Dec Code: 27 91 P1 59 P2 59...P9 39 113
Purpose: Selects bar code type and orientation.
Discussion:Once defined, bar code parameters remain in effect until:
•A new bar code select parameter sequence is sent
•A reset command returns settings to default values
•On power-up, the default values are set
Bar code parameters are set according to the following
choices:
•P1 defines parameters for the various bar code styles:
204
Chapter 4 Select Bar Codes Attributes Sequence (DECSBCA)
•P2 sets the width for the narrow bars and spaces in units
specified by the SSU code.
Default value =10 pixels = 12 decipoints
Minimum value =9 pixels = 11 decipoints
This does not apply to all UPC, EAN, and Postnet bar codes.
•P3 sets the width for the quiet zone. The printer's quiet zone
is a constant pixel value of 150 pixels (180 decipoints) or
ten times the narrow bar, whichever is greater.
This does not apply to all UPC, EAN, and Postnet bar codes.
•P4 sets the width of the wide bars and wide spaces in units
specified by the SSU code.
Default value = 2.5 times the value of P2
Minimum value = 2.4 times the narrow bar when the narrow
bar is less than or equal to twelve pixels
This does not apply to all UPC, EAN, Code 11, Code 128,
and Postnet bar codes.
•P5 sets the intercharacter gap in units specified by the SSU
code.
Default value =136 pixels
This does not apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 code, or to all
UPC, Code 128, EAN, and Postnet bar codes.
•P6 sets the height of bars in units specified by the SSU code.
Minimum value =144 pixels = 173 decipoints
Default value =300 pixels = 360 decipoints
P1 Function P1 Function
0/missing Code 39 (default) 8 Codabar b/n
1 Interleaved 2 of 5 9 Codabar c/*
2 Code 39 10 Codabar d/e
3 Extended Code 39 11 UPC-A
4 EAN-8 12 UPC-E
5EAN-13 13Postnet
6 Code 11 14 Code 128
7 Codabar a/t 15 Code 128-
UCC
205
•P7 defines the control character encoding character
(CCEC). Any character within a range of 2/0 through 7/15
indicates the start of control character encoding. The
CCEC is followed by a two-digit hexadecimal number
equal to the ASCII value of the character to be encoded.
To bar code the ESC character, enter the CCEC, then
the ESC character's hexadecimal format. The default is
P7 = 0.
This only applies to Extended Code 39.
•P8 sets the orientation for the bar codes. Bar codes can be
rotated to four different positions, though any characters
beneath them are printed only in portrait or landscape
orientations. The default is P8=0
.
P7 Function
0/missing n No encoding of control characters
The decimal ASCII value representing
the control character encoding
character.
P8 Function
0/missing Same as current page orientation
1 Horizontal (portrait)
2Vertical, rotation of -90°(landscape)
3Vertical, rotation of +90°(landscape)
4Horizontal, upside down, rotation of 180°
P9 Function
0/missing No human-readable characters printed
1 No human-readable characters printed
2 human-readable characters printed in
current font
3 human-readable characters printed in
OCR-A
4 human-readable characters printed in
OCR-B
206
Chapter 4 Select Bar Codes Attributes Sequence (DECSBCA)
NOTE:When printing the human-readable line for any rotations other
than zero degrees (horizontal portrait mode), the special bar
code font is used regardless of how the P9 parameter is set
(2, 3, or 4). OCR-A and OCR-B are available only in portrait
orientation.
This does not apply to the Postnet bar code.
IMPORTANT
If the printer's logical form-length setting DECSLPP or DECSTBM (or the
control panel form length setting) does not match the physical form
length of the paper in use, then bar codes located near (on or across)
the logical perforation will not print correctly. Make sure that the forms
length setting matches the physical form, and do not print bar codes on
or across the perforation.
If an illegal parameter sequence is requested, the sequence is
ignored and the last bar code parameter remains unchanged.
207
Start Bar Coding (DECBARC)
ASCII Code: ESC%SP0
Hex Code: 1B 25 20 30
Dec Code: 27 37 32 48
Purpose: Generates bar codes using data that follow the sequence.
Discussion:Bar code parameters are defined by the last DECSBCA
sequence. The printer continues to encode bar codes until it
receives the Stop Bar Code sequence.
The printer begins to generate a bar code at the upper left-
hand corner of the left quiet zone and ends at the lower right-
hand corner of the right quiet zone. Bar codes that extend
beyond the margins are truncated.
Stop Bar Coding (Return from Other Coding System:
ROCS)
ASCII Code: ESC%@
Hex Code: 1B 25 40
Dec Code: 27 37 64
Purpose: Stops bar code printing.
Discussion:Once bar coding is stopped, the font selection and associated
attributes are restored to the conditions prevailing prior to bar
code printing.
208
Chapter 4 Bar Code Characteristics
Bar Code Characteristics
The printer supports fifteen bar code styles:
•Code 39 (default or user-selectable settings)
•Extended Code 39
•Interleaved 2 of 5
•EAN 8
•EAN 13
•Code 11
•Codebar a/t
•Codebar b/n
•Codebar c/*
•Codebar d/e
•UPC-A
•UPC-E
•Postnet
•Code 128 - USS (regular)
•Code 128 - UCC (serial shipping container code)
All bar code styles differ, though the differences can be subtle or obvious. The
following subsections discuss bar code characteristics that are pertinent to
printing readable bar codes.
Number of Bars per Character
Each bar code style is made up of a specific number of light and dark bars.
Dark bars are the inked, machine-readable lines; light bars are the unprinted
spaces between the dark bars. Several styles of light and dark bar
combinations exist. For example:
•In the Code 39 style, both light and dark bars are encoded to define a
single character.
•In the Interleaved 2 of 5 style, the light bars decode one character while
the dark bars decode another character.
The light bars and dark bars can also be narrow or wide. These width
variations are unique to each bar code style.
Bar Code Character Set
Different bar code styles allow certain parts of the ASCII character set to be
used. Some styles allow only the numerals 0 - 9, while others allow the full
ASCII character set, and still others allow variations in between.
209
START, STOP, and CENTER Code Characters
The START/STOP characters identify the beginning and end of the bar code
symbol to the bar code reader. The START code is at the left end of the
symbol, next to the most significant character. The STOP code is at the right
end of the symbol, next to the least significant character.
Some bar code styles have a CENTER character code. This code divides the
characters so that a digit that appears on both sides of the CENTER code can
have a certain bar pattern on the left side that differs from the pattern on the
right side. This is possible because the digits to the left of the CENTER
character code are usually coded in odd parity, while the digits to the right of
the CENTER bar are coded in even parity.
Quiet Zone
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet
zones should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure
accurate reading of the START/STOP codes and to prevent adjacent bar
codes from overlapping. The operator is responsible for providing sufficient
space on the form for the quiet zones.
Intercharacter Gap
The intercharacter gap separates the last bar in one character from the first
bar of the next character. The intercharacter gap is required in styles where
each character begins and ends with a dark bar.
Number of Characters in a Bar Code
There is no set number of characters for all bar codes. Some styles have a
specific number of characters necessary for making individual bar codes (for
example, UPC-A uses an 11-character symbol). Code 39, however, uses
character symbols of variable length.
Checksums
Checksums can be included within the bar code symbol. If a checksum digit is
required for a particular style, it is computed by the user and sent along with
the rest of the characters that make up the bar code symbol. The printer
automatically computes the check digit and embeds it at the end of the bar
code for the UPC, EAN, Code 11, Code 128, and Postnet bar codes.
Parity
You can use odd or even parity to send an individual character in styles EAN-
8, EAN-13, UPC-A, and UPC-E. The individual digits (0 through 9, since these
are the only allowable characters in these styles) might have different bar
patterns, depending on whether the character is coded in odd or even parity.
210
Chapter 4 Bar Code Characteristics
Multiple Bar Codes
The printer can print multiple bar codes on the same line. To do this, use the
following sequence:
The above method prints multiple bar codes on one line by means of multiple
passes. For example, the printer will print the first bar code, reverse the
paper, then print the next bar code on the same line.
The sequence for printing multiple bar codes is shown below, implemented
via control codes described on the indicated pages:
POSITION START Print Stop POSITION Start next Print Stop
(VPA) bar code bar code bar code (VPA) bar code bar code bar code
<esc>{3d <esc>% 0<esc>% @ <esc> [3d <esc>% 0 <esc>% @
|______| |_______| |_______| |_______| |_______| |________|
data data
VPA DECBARC ROCS VPA DECBARC ROCS
211
Bar Code Styles
The following sections discuss the bar codes the printer can make. The
characteristics of bar code styles, P1 - P9 values, and their defaults are also
discussed.
Code 39
In the Code 39 style, there are five dark bars and four light bars for a total of
nine bars. Three bars are wide and the other six are narrow. Both light and
dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow light/dark bar is
assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a binary 1.
Code 39 has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9), uppercase letters A - Z, plus eight
additional characters (- . $ / + % SP *)
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
Extended Code 39
For printable characters, Extended Code 39 prints like Code 39. With control
characters, Extended Code 39 decodes and prints the control characters as
their combined printable codes. See Table 58 for the Extended Code 39
ASCII character set.
Table 58. Extended Code 39 ASCII Character Set
ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39
NUL %U SP Space @ %V ` %W
SOH $A ' /A A A a +A
STX $B /B B B b +B
ETX $C # /C C C c +C
EOT $D $ /D D D d +D
ENQ $E % /E E E e +E
ACK $F & /F F F f +F
BEL $G ' /G G G g +G
212
Chapter 4 Extended Code 39
BS $H ( /H H H h +H
HT $I ) /I I I i I
LF $J * /J J J | +J
VT $K + /K K K k +K
FF $L , /L L L l +L
CR$M -- -- MM m+M
SO $N . . N N n +N
SI $O / /O O O o +O
DLE $P 0 0 P P p +P
DC1 $Q 1 1 Q Q q +Q
DC2 $R 2 2 R R r +R
DC3 $S 3 3 S S s +S
DC4 $T 4 4 T T t +T
NAK $U 5 5 U U u +U
SYN $V 6 6 V V v +V
ETB $W 7 7 W W w +W
CAN $X 8 8 X X x +X
EM $Y 9 9 Y Y y +Y
SUB $Z : /Z Z Z z +Z
ESC %A ; %F [ %K { %P
FS %B < %G \ %L | %Q
GS %C %H ] %M } %R
RS %D > %I ^ %N ~ %S
US %E ? %J ____ %O DEL %T %X
%Y %Z
Table 58. Extended Code 39 ASCII Character Set
ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39 ASCII Code 39
213
Code 11
In the Code 11 style, there are three dark bars and two light bars for a total of
five bars. Both light and dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow
light/dark bar is assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a
binary 1.
Code 11 has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9) and the dash (-) character
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•Two checksums are computed automatically and embedded at the end of
the bar code. The checksum data is not printed as part of the human-
readable data field.
Codabar a/t
Codabar a/t has four dark bars and three light bars for a total of seven bars.
Both light and dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow light/dark
bar is assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a binary 1.
Codabar a/t has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9) plus six characters (- . $ / + :)
•Illegal characters are not processed and are ignored.
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
214
Chapter 4 Codabar b/n
Codabar b/n
Codabar b/n has four dark bars and three light bars for a total of seven bars.
Both light and dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow light/dark
bar is assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a binary 1.
Codabar b/n has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9) plus six characters (: / . + $ -)
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
Codabar c/*
Codabar c/* has four dark bars and three light bars for a total of seven bars.
Both light and dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow light/dark
bar is assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a binary 1.
Codabar c/* has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9) plus six characters (: / . + $ -)
•Illegal characters are not processed and are ignored.
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
215
Codabar d/e
Codabar d/e has four dark bars and three light bars for a total of seven bars.
Both light and dark bars are coded to define the character. A narrow light/dark
bar is assigned a binary 0 and a wide light/dark bar is assigned a binary 1.
Codabar d/e has the following characteristics:
•Character set includes ten digits (0 - 9) plus six characters (: / . + $ -)
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Definable intercharacter gap
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
EAN-8
EAN-8 contains two dark bars and two light bars for a total of four bars. Each
light and dark bar is 1 - 4 modules wide. A module is the smallest increment
that can represent data. Zeros are represented by light modules and ones by
dark modules. Each character contains some combination of seven modules
that total two dark bars and two light bars.
The above is always true except with the START/STOP and CENTER
character codes. The START/STOP character bar pattern consists of two
dark bars and one light bar for a total of three bars. The CENTER character
bar pattern has two dark bars and three light bars for a total of five bars.
Parameters P2 through P5 and P7 are not applicable and will be ignored.
EAN-8 has the following characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•START and STOP codes
•CENTER code
•Intercharacter gap not definable
•Fixed length of seven characters per complete symbol. The first digit is
the number system code, followed by six digits of data. The printer
computes the check digit automatically and embeds it in the bar code as
the eighth digit. All eight digits are encoded in the bar code symbol with
four digits to the left of the CENTER code in odd parity, and four digits to
the right of the CENTER code in even parity.
•If more or less than seven characters are used, or if any of the characters
used are illegal, an error message is printed.
•The minimum character height is set at 12 mm, per ISO STD-P6
limitation.
216
Chapter 4 EAN-13
EAN-13
EAN-13 has two dark bars and two light bars for a total of four bars. Each
light/dark bar is 1 - 4 modules wide. A module is the smallest increment that
can represent data. Zeros are represented by light modules and ones by dark
modules. Each character contains some combination of seven modules that
total two dark bars and two light bars.
The above is always true except with the START/STOP and CENTER
character codes. The START/STOP character bar pattern consists of two
dark bars and one light bar for a total of three bars. The CENTER character
bar pattern has two dark bars and three light bar for a total of five bars.
Parameters P2 through P5 and P7 are not applicable and will be ignored.
EAN-13 has the following characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•START and STOP codes
•CENTER code
•Intercharacter gap not definable
•Fixed length of twelve characters per complete symbol. The first digit is
the number system code, followed by eleven digits of data, then the check
digit. Only twelve of the digits (the second through the thirteenth) are
encoded in the bar code symbol with six digits to the left of the CENTER
code and six to the right of it. An EAN-13 number can have three different
bar patterns depending on its position and number system code. The
printer computes the check digit automatically and embeds it in the bar
code as the thirteenth digit. All thirteen digits are printable in the human-
readable line.
•If more or less than twelve characters are used, or if any of the characters
used are illegal, an error message is printed.
•The minimum character height is set at 12 mm, per ISO STD-P6
limitation.
Interleaved 2 of 5
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or
spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are
interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair
and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.
The above is always true except with the START and STOP character codes.
The START character bar pattern consists of two dark bars and two light bars
for a total of four bars. The STOP character bar pattern has two dark bars and
one light bar for a total of three bars.
This style includes the following characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•START and STOP codes
217
•Illegal characters are not processed and are ignored.
•No CENTER code
•Intercharacter gap not definable
•A variable length of characters per complete symbol. If an odd number of
input digits is sent, the printer inserts a leading 0 to the data stream. This
encodes in the bar code symbol and prints in the human-readable line.
•If a checksum is required for bar code readability, you must include it as
part of the data.
UPC-A
UPC-A has two dark bars and two light bars for a total of four bars. Each light/
dark bar is 1 - 4 modules wide. A module is the smallest increment that can
represent data. Zeros are represented by light modules and ones by dark
modules. Each character contains some combination of seven modules that
total two dark bars and two light bars.
The above is always true except with the START/STOP and CENTER
character codes. The START/STOP character bar pattern consists of two
dark bars and one light bar for a total of three bars. The CENTER character
bar pattern has two dark bars and three light bars for a total of five bars.
Parameters P2 through P5 and P7 are not applicable and are ignored.
UCP-A has the following characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•START and STOP codes
•CENTER code
•Intercharacter gap not definable
•Fixed length of eleven characters per complete symbol. The first digit is
the number system code, usually followed by a five digit vendor number.
The next five digits are typically the product number. The printer
automatically computes the check digit and embeds it at the end of the
bar code. All twelve digits are encoded in the bar code symbol, with six
digits to the left of the CENTER code in odd parity and six to the right of
theCENTERcodewithevenparity.
•If more or less than eleven characters are used or if any of the characters
used are illegal, an error message is printed.
218
Chapter 4 UPC-E
UPC-E
UPC-E has two dark bars and two light bars for a total of four bars. Each light/
dark bar is 1 - 4 modules wide. A module is the smallest increment that can
represent data. Zeros are represented by light modules and ones by dark
modules. Each character contains some combination of seven modules that
total two dark bars and two light bars.
The above is always true except with the START and STOP character codes.
The START character bar pattern consists of two dark bars and one light bar
for a total of three bars. The STOP character bar pattern has three dark bars
and three light bars for a total of six bars.
Parameters P2 through P5 and P7 are not applicable and are ignored.
UPC-E has the following characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Intercharacter gap not definable
•Fixed length of eleven digits per complete symbol. The first character of
the data field is interpreted as the number system code and must always
equal 0. The next five digits represent the vendor number and the last five
represent the product number.
•If more or less than eleven characters are used or if any of the characters
are illegal, an error message is printed.
Six of the eleven digits are encoded into the bar code symbol. These six digits
are taken from the eleven digit UPC input code as follows:
•If the vendor number (the first five digits after the number system code)
ends in 000, 100, or 200, the product number (the second five digits) must
fall between 00000 and 00999. The six digits that make up the bar code
symbol are the first two characters of the vendor number, the last three
characters of the product number, and the third character of the vendor
number, in that order. Therefore, the sequence of digits taken is 1st, 2nd,
8th, 9th, 10th, 3rd.
•If the vendor number ends in 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, or 900, the
product number must fall between 00000 and 00099. The six digits that
make up the bar code are the first three characters of the vendor number,
the last two characters of the product number, then a 3. Therefore, the
sequence of digits taken is 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 9th, 10th, 3.
•If the vendor number ends in 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90, the
product number must fall between 00000 and 00009. The six digits that
make up the bar code symbol are the first four characters of the product
number, followed by a 4. Therefore, the sequence of digits taken is 1st,
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 10th, 4.
219
•If the vendor number does not end in a zero, the product number must fall
between 00005 and 00009. The six digits that make up the bar code
symbol are all five digits of the vendor number, followed by the product
number's last character. Therefore, the sequence of digits taken is 1st,
2nd,3rd,4th,5th,10th.
•If the digit input does not fall into one of the above four categories, it is
considered invalid and an error message is printed.
•The printer computes a modulo 10 checksum digit so that the six digits to
be encoded in the bar code symbol are selected correctly. However, the
check digit is not encoded as part of the bar code symbol and is not
printed in the human-readable line.
Table 59. UPC-E Number Pattern Sequences
XX000
XX100
XX200
XX300
XX900
XXX10
XXX90
XXXX1
XXXX9
.
.
.
.
.
.
00 000
00 999
.
.
.
000 00
000 99
.
.
.
0000 0
0000 9
.
.
.
0000 5
0000 9
.
.
.
XX000
XX .
.
.
XX999
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
XX 003
XX 3
XX 3
.
.
..
.
.
99
XXX 40
XXX 4
XXX 49
.
.
.
XXX 5X
XXXX
XXX 9X
.
.
.
0
1
2
3
9
1
9
1
9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTE: X may range from 0 to 9
.
.
.
If the Vendor
Number is: And the Product
Number is:
Then the Encoded
UPC-E Bar Code
Symbol is:
220
Chapter 4 Postnet
Postnet
Print mode text and graphic elements print at different densities. When the
two are mixed, a paper reversal can occur because of the different densities.
When the Plot Mode option is set to Enable from the control panel, Postnet
barcodes are printed in a Data Processing density (120 x 75 dpi) in the
following printing conditions:
1. Printer is currently in print mode.
2. Current density is 120 x 75 dpi.
3. Printer is in the portrait orientation.
Printing in Data Processing density speeds applications which use Postnet
barcodes and text. It reduces the chances of reverse motion and improves
throughput.
If the Plot Mode option is disabled, Postnet barcodes are printed in a Graphic
density (via Plot Mode) as dictated by the DECSGD command.
The Postnet bar code has two tall bars and three short bars for a total of five
bars. These five bars represent a numeric digit with valid values from 0 to 9.
The above is always true except with the START/STOP character codes. The
START character bar pattern has one tall bar and one space. The STOP
character has one space and one tall bar. Parameters P2 through P5, P7, and
P9 are not applicable and are ignored. Postnet has the following
characteristics:
•Ten digit character set (0 - 9)
•Illegal characters are not processed and are ignored.
•START and STOP codes
•No CENTER code
•Variable length characters per complete symbol
•A checksum is calculated automatically then embedded at the end of the
bar code.
•The human-readable data field is not printed.
Code 128 - USS
Code 128 includes three character subsets: A, B, and C. (Code 128-UCC
uses subset C only.) All contain the same bar patterns, except for the unique
start character that tells the bar code reader which subset is in use. Special
characters are available for switching between the subsets in order to
generate the shortest possible bar code. (Only subset C is used for 128-UCC,
so mode selection is not allowed.)
The Code 128 and 128-UCC structure is shown in and described on the
following pages.
221
Figure 3. Code 128 Structure
Start/Stop Codes
Code 128 contains special characters which use unique start/stop codes to
identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. In the automatic mode,
start and stop codes are generated automatically. In the manual mode, you
must supply the start code, but the stop code is generated automatically.
Data Field
Code 128 bar codes support a full ASCII character set: Subset A provides
standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, control and special characters;
subset B includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase
alphabetical characters, and special characters; subset C provides 100 digit
pairs, from 00 to 99 inclusive, plus special characters. Table 60 lists the full
Code 128 character set. The “greater than” symbol (>), followed by one of
various characters, allows you to manually shift between subsets, specify a
particular subset to start with, or to include several non-printable control
characters in the data set. (To include the “greater than” symbol itself, you
must use >0.) This is described in the Mode Selection section below. The
bars and spaces in the printed Code 128 bar code vary in width from 1 to 4
modules. Each character consists of 3 bars and 3 spaces that total 11
modules.
Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar
code data. Bar code data is printed below the horizontal bar code. The lower
guard band is provided when the readable data field is selected. The readable
data field is available only in the automatic mode. For 128-UCC, the optional
readable data is broken up by spaces to denote 128-UCC data fields.
Check Digit
For Code 128, the modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and
inserted in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.
The start code is included in the modulo-103 check digit algorithm.
For 128-UCC, the modulo-10 and 103 check digits are automatically
calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies
accurate scanning.
DATA FIELD QUIETQUIET START STOP
LOWER GUARD BAND
CODE CODEZONE ZONE
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD
HEIGHT
UPPER GUARD BAND
STARTING
POSITION
CHECK DIGIT
FIELD
222
Chapter 4 Code 128 - USS
Code 128 Mode Selection
The printer generates Code 128 bar codes in one of two modes: automatic or
manual.
Automatic Mode
The printer creates the shortest possible bar code by automatically sending
the subset switch character to switch from subset B into subset C whenever
strings of four or more consecutive numeric characters are detected in the
input data. As long as the data includes ordinary keyboard characters and no
subset switch, the printer switches in and out of subsets B and C
automatically before and after numeric character strings. Start codes, stop
codes, and check digits are generated automatically.
NOTE: You must use >0 to represent the > character. The printer recognizes
>0 as the “greater than” character (>) on a standard ASCII chart.
Manual Mode
Manual mode is selected by inputting a subset switch character (characters
preceded by >) anywhere in the bar code data. In the manual mode, you must
insert the special codes into the bar code to switch to another subset. When
the printer finds a special code in the data, all automatic switching features
are suspended, the readable data field option is cancelled, and the printer
expects you to provide all special code switching commands. In manual
mode, you must supply the start code; if no start code is provided, the printer
inserts a subset B start code. Stop codes and check digits are generated
automatically in the manual mode. More information about Manual Mode is
provided in the following section.
Code 128 Manual Mode Operation
NOTE: In the manual mode, you are responsible for correct implementation
of Code 128 in accordance with the Code 128 Standards Manual.
The Code 128 character set is shown in Table 60. The Alternate column
identifies the special subset switch characters that switch the printer to the
manual mode. These > characters are also horizontally aligned with functions
also performed in the automatic mode. For example, >/ represents SI in
subset A, o in subset B, and value 79 in subset C. Thus, the following
commands generate the same bar code using Alternate characters, or
subsets B or C:
Subset Switch Characters: >7>,>->.>/
Subset C: >576777879
Subset B: >6lmno
Non-ASCII characters are specified by using the subset switch characters
(from >1 through >8 in the Alternate column on Table 60) which corresponds
to your application. The Value column is used when manually translating
subset B and C bar codes into their briefest form.
223
NOTE: The subset switch start codes, >5, >6, and >7 have two functions. At
the beginning of a line, they start manual mode data in subset C, B, or
A, respectively. When these codes are used anywhere in the data
other than at the start of a line, they are interpreted as the non-ASCII
characters in Table 60.
Subset B and C Switching - In the automatic mode, the printer creates the
briefest, most compact bar code by automatically switching from subset B to
subset C when necessary. For example, the data LT436682 could be entered
directly into a typed bar code command as ESC%0LT436682ESC%@. The
printer automatically selects the appropriate start code, and switches to
subset C to compact the continuous numeric data characters (436682).
224
Chapter 4 Code 128 - USS
In the manual mode, however, you must specify the start code and all special
function codes to switch subsets. For example, to create the same bar code
as generated automatically in the previous paragraph (data of LT436682), the
subset B start code is entered, followed by the alpha data (LT), and the
subset switch character to switch to subset C is entered followed by the
continuous numeric characters. A typical bar code command, in the manual
mode, for the data is: ESC%0>6LT>5KbrESC%@. The pairs of continuous
numeric data were manually translated to subset B, data Kbr, corresponding
to the subset C values of 436682, respectively, as shown in Table 60. If the
data (LT436682) had been entered directly into the bar code command as
ESC%0>6LT>5436682ESC%@ the bar code generated would have been:
Start Code B: LT, subset C: 20 19 22 22 24 18, as determined by the value of
the individual data characters in Table 60.
NOTE: If a start code is not entered in the manual mode, the printer provides
a subset B start code.
Subset A - Subset A operates in the manual mode only. Subset A data
characters include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no
subset switching and can be entered directly. For example, the data ABC123
in subset A is input in the bar code command as: ESC%0>7ABC123ESC%@.
Switching to another subset will not generate a shorter bar code.
You can generate non-printable control characters in subset A by:
1. using the subset B lowercase character equivalent from Table 60
( ` through ~), which map to NUL through RS; or
2. using the subset switch characters (>1 through >8, or >SP through >/)
from the Alternate column of Table 60.
225
Table 60. Code 128 Character Set
Value B C Value A B C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
A
Subset Alternate
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
'
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODE C
CODE B
FNC4
FNC1
START CODE A*
START CODE B*
START CODE C*
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
'
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
}
~
DEL
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODE C
FNC4
CODE A
FNC1
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
CODE B
CODE A
FNC1
>SP
>!
>"
>#
>$
>%
>&
>'
''
>(
>)
>*
>+
>,
>-
>.
>/
>1
>2
>3
>4
>5
>6
>7
>8
>7
>6
>5
*Used at the beginning of manual mode commands.
Subset Subset Subset Subset Subset
226
Chapter 4 Code 128 - USS
Code 128 Examples
The following commands generate the horizontal default ratio Code 128 bar
code below in the automatic mode. In the Start Bar Code sequence
(DECBARC), SP represents the ASCII space character (hex 20).
ESC[14;;;;;;;;2'q
ESC%SP0ABC123456ESC%@
The following command generated the Code 128 bar code below in the
automatic mode using data of 22446688ABC123456. The bar code data
begins in subset B and automatically switches to subset C for the numeric
data. In the Start Bar Code sequence (DECBARC), SP represents the ASCII
space character (hex 20).
ESC[14;;;;;;;;2'q
ESC%SP022446688ABC123456ESC%@
227
The command below generates the following vertical Code 128 bar code with
data of 123@25% in manual mode, subset A. In the Start Bar Code sequence
(DECBARC), SP represents the ASCII space character (hex 20).
ESC[14;;;;;;;2;'q
ESC%SP0>7123@25%ESC%@
The command below generates the same vertical Code 128 bar code in the
automatic mode, subset B. Because less than 4 consecutive numeric digits
were provided in the data, no subset switching occurred, and the bar code
remained in subset B. In the Start Bar Code sequence (DECBARC), SP
represents the ASCII space character (hex 20).
ESC[14;;;;;;;2;'q
ESC%SP0123@25%ESC%@
228
Chapter 4 Code 128 - UCC
Code 128 - UCC
The 128-UCC Serial Shipping Container Code is a restricted subset of the
Code 128-USS standard. It is used as a standard for labeling shipping
containers.
The 128-UCC Serial Shipping Container Code has the following parts:
•Start Code - The 128-UCC Serial Shipping Container Code consists of
numeric data only, so the start code is always Start-C. This is followed by
the function code 1 character, which is part of the 128-UCC standard.
These are automatically generated by the printer.
•Qualifier - This 2-digit number helps identify the symbol as a 128-UCC
Serial Shipping Container Code. It is always 00, and uses one character
subset C symbol. This is automatically generated by the printer.
•Data - 17 numbers you choose to describe a particular shipping
container. These are the only numbers that you need to specify; the
printer generates the other elements of the bar code automatically.
•Check Characters - The 128-UCC Serial Shipping Container Code uses
two check characters. The first is a modulo 10 check digit generated from
your input data, and printed in human-readable characters. The second is
the normal Code 128 modulo 103 check character. The printer calculates
both of these numbers automatically.
•Stop Code - This is the normal stop code used in the Code 128 bar code.
This character is automatically generated by the printer.
Code 128-UCC Example
A Code 128-UCC bar code created on the printer is shown below. The label
data are 11223344556677889. The DESBCA sequence selects UCC-128
with P1 = 15 and P9 = 2 for human readable characters. The DECBARC
command starts the bar coding, and ROCS stops the bar coding. Notice that
the printer automatically generated the start code, the qualifier, the check
digits, and the stop code.
ESC[15;;;;;;;;2`q
ESC%SP011223344556677889ESC%@
Start Code
(StartC/Func1) Stop Code
Qualifier Data Mod 10
Check Digit
229
Density and Spacing Between Bar Codes
The following subsections describe the spacing between different
combinations of horizontal and vertical spacings between the bar codes.
Horizontal Bar Codes (0 and 180 Degree Rotation)
The width of a horizontal bar code is a function of the number of characters in
the bar code symbol, the style of the bar code symbol, and the ratio of wide
light/dark bars to narrow light/dark bars. The bar code height is specified as a
parameter where the default is 0.75 inches. The human-readable line is not
included. If the human-readable line is printed, a gap of 0.1 inch is inserted
between the bottom of the bar code symbol and the human-readable line. The
human-readable line is printed below the bar code symbol.
Horizontal bar codes (0 and 180 degree rotation), are printed at 100 dots per
inch (dpi) horizontally and 100 dpi vertically.
Horizontal Spacing Between Horizontal Bar Codes
A 0.25 inch leading space always appears before a bar code symbol and a
0.25 inch trailing space is inserted after a bar code symbol for a total of 0.5
inches of space between any two bar codes. The leading and trailing spaces
are called quiet zones.
Three delimiters are allowed for all bar code styles:
•Space character (20H), except for bar code 39
•Comma character (2CH)
•Horizontal tab character (09H)
The space character adds an extra 0.1 inches of white space between the bar
code, the comma adds no extra white space, and the horizontal tab adds the
amount set by the tabs. This additional white space is added to the 0.5 inches
of the quiet zones that separate the two bar codes.
The horizontal limit is specified by the width of the paper, typically 13.2
inches. Therefore, the width of the encoded bar code symbol plus any
spacing between two or more symbols cannot exceed 13.2 inches. If a bar
code symbol exceeds the right margin, the printable portion is printed and the
remainder is truncated.
Vertical Spacing Between Horizontal Bar Codes
The vertical limit is equal to the maximum allowable height for a bar code
symbol: 10 inches. If the human-readable line is printed, then a 0.1 inch gap
plus character size is added to compute a total vertical distance.
If the human-readable line is printed, a space the size of the intercharacter
gap exists between the human-readable line and the top of the bar code
symbol on the next line, plus any linefeeds you have specified.
If there is no human-readable line, the vertical spacing is dependent on the
user for how many linefeeds have been specified.
230
Chapter 4 Density and Spacing Between Bar Codes
Vertical Bar Codes (90 and 270 Degree Rotation)
The width of the rotated bar code is close in size to the height of the original
horizontal bar code (they are not quite the same since the density changes). If
the human-readable line is printed, it is accounted for in the total horizontal
distance travelled.
The vertical height of the rotated bar code includes the 0.25 inch leading
space, the light and dark bars that comprise the bar code symbol, and the
0.25 inch trailing space.
Vertical bar codes are printed with a horizontal density of 100 DPI and a
vertical density of 100 DPI.
Horizontal Spacing Between Vertical Bar Codes
The horizontal limit is the width of the paper (or 13.2 inches). The following
equation applies with rotated bar codes, where N equals the number of bar
code symbols to be printed and HEIGHT equals the height parameter entered
for the original bar code:
(N)*(HEIGHT) + any spacing between two or more symbols must be less than
or equal to 13.2 inches
Ensure proper horizontal spacing between two vertical bar codes. Note that
the leading and trailing spaces rotate with the vertical bar codes.
The space character (20H) and the horizontal tab character (09H) produce
the white spaces horizontally across the page, just as they do for the
horizontal bar codes. The comma delimiter does not separate bar code
symbols on the paper. Therefore, if a line of input is rotated with the comma
as the delimiter, the bar code symbols are printed one against another. You
must use either the space character (20 hex) or the horizontal tab character
(09 hex) to keep this from occurring.
If a human-readable line is printed, its 0.1 inch gap is computed into the total
horizontal distance.
Vertical Spacing Between Vertical Bar Codes
Vertical spacing is achieved via user-supplied linefeeds.
The vertical limit of any vertical bar code (90 or 270 degree rotation) is the
current forms length. The encoded bar code symbols, including quiet zones,
must be less than or equal to the current printable forms length for a given line
of ASCII input.
If paper length is exceeded during printing, the bar code symbol prints as far
as possible, then terminates.
231
ALG Emulation
Character Sets
Introduction
This appendix contains character address charts for the LG emulation which
are available with the DEC LG Emulation printer. The first two tables show the
character sets available in the Proprinter emulation mode. They can be
selected at the control panel or by control codes from the host computer.
These character sets are not available in LG emulation. The LG character
sets are available only in LG emulation mode.
The LG Emulation Languages Substitution Table (page 236) identifies
specific character substitutions available in the selected language. For
example, if you select the U.S. ASCII character set, 023 hex represents the
number sign (#).If you then select DEC Dutch, 023 hex represents the
English pound symbol (£) instead of the number sign. For each language,
only the characters that may differ from the ASCII character set are shown. If
a character is not shown on the LG Emulation Languages Substitution Table,
itisthesameasintheASCIIcharacterset.
LG Emulation Character Set Charts
The following languages comprise the multinational character sets. These
languages are only available in the LG emulation. Included are the following:
•U.S. ASCII
•DEC British
•DEC Dutch
•DEC Finnish
•French
•DEC French (Canadian)
•German
•Italian
•JIS Roman
•DEC Norwegian/Danish
•Spanish
•DEC Swedish
232
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
•ISO Norwegian/Danish
•DEC Portuguese
The LG Emulation Languages Substitution Table (page A-8) identifies specific
character substitutions available in the selected language. Hex addresses not
shown on the substitution tables use the character in the hex address shown
on the standard character set matrix.
233
US ASCII Character Set
KEY
ASCII CHARACTER
ESC 33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
10 1 1
B4 B2B3 B1
B7 B6 B5
001
BITS
B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0
B5 0 01101100011011
COLUMN
01234567
BITS
ROW
B4 B2B3 B1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000
00 10
00 1 0
00 1 1
01 0 0
01 0 1
01 1 0
01 1 1
1000
10 0 1
10 1 0
10 1 1
11 0 0
11 0 1
11 1 0
11 1 1
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
(XON)
(XOFF)
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
18
24
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
+
,
-
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
0
0
0
0
0
0
^
*
Note: The character examples provided
herein are representative and not exact
replications generated by the printer. All
characters are shown in 10 cpi; not all
characters are available in all print modes.
234
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
DEC Multinational Character Set
B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0
B5 0 01101100011011
COLUMN
01234567
BITS
ROW
B4 B2B3 B1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000
00 10
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
NUL
EOT
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
DC1
DC3
CAN
SUB
ESC
(XON)
(XOFF)
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
18
24
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
+
,
-
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
0
0
0
0
0
0
^
*
U.S. ASCII CHARACTER SETASCII
Control Codes
B8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7-bit mode or bit 8 set to zero
KEY
CHARACTER
ESC 33
27
1B
OCTAL
HEX
10 1 1
B4 B2B3 B1
B7 B6 B5
001
BITS
DECIMA
L
Note: The character examples provided herein are
representative and not exact replications generated by
the printer. All characters are shown in 10 cpi; not all
characters are available in all print modes.
235
00001111
0001101100011011
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
213
139
214
140
215
141
216
142
217
143
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
98
152
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
11111111
¡
¿
ªº
N
~
+
-
<< >>
¢
ÿ
¥
£
§
µ
W
Á
À
Â
~
A
Æ
Å
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ë
Ê
Î
Ï
Ì
Í
Ó
Ò
Ö
Ô
~
O
Ø
Ù
Ü
Û
á
í
ó
ú
~
n
æ
ç
ä
à
å
^
a
~
a
è
é
ë
^
e
î
ï
ì
ö
ò
~
o
ü
û
ù
ø
¤
**
Ú
Y
..
w
ô
DEC SUPPLEMENTAL
Control Codes
Additional
CHARACTER SET
IND
NEL
HTS
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
CSI
ST
(Not
Used)
(Not
Used)
Columns 8 and 9 can
be converted to 7-bit
Escape sequences. Columns 10 thru 15 are
only accessed in 8-bit mode.
14
12
2
3
β
5
1
KEY
CHARACTER
ESC 33
27
1B
OCTAL
HEX
10 1 1
B4 B2B3 B1
B7 B6 B5
001
BITS
DECIMAL
Note: The character examples provided herein are
representative and not exact replications generated by
the printer. All characters are shown in 10 cpi; not all
characters are available in all print modes.
Each shaded box will print as a reverse question mark .
236
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
LG Emulation Languages Substitution Table
LANGUAGE
U.S. ASCII
French
German
Great Britian
Digital
Italian
Spanish
Digital French
Canadian
Hex Address
0023 0040 005B 005C 005D 005E 0060 007B 007C 007D 007E
#
#
£
#
@
@
3/4
à
à
§
[
[
Ä
¡
\
ç
ç
Ö
\
]
]
§
Ü
é
¿
^
^
^
^
^
î
ù
{
{
é
é
ä
à
ù
ù
ö
ò
}
è
è
è
ü
}
~
~
~
¨
ì
û
005F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Digital #@ü
5
5
β
N
~
ô
~
n
âê
Finnish
Digital
Norwegian/ #ü
Digital
Swiss
Digital
Portuguese #@õ
Danish
¥
Digital #ÉÄÖ Ü éä ö üÅå
-
Swedish
JIS Roman ~
@^ }
-
Dutch ÿ1/2 ¨
^*1/4 `
ÄÅÜ
-äå
#[]{
§ç
ÄÆØ Å Ü-äæ ø å
§5^ç
ùàè
çêî
éô
äöüû
ISO
Norwegian/
Danish #ÆØ Å -æøå
@^~
~
A~
O^-ãç~
Ç
£
Ö
£
£
£
éö
237
LG Emulation 94-Character Sets
The following pages show the 94-Character Set charts (also referred to as
code pages) for the LG emulation. The character sets are shown in Near
Letter Quality (NLQ) print mode. These character sets may be selected using
the configuration menus, described in the
Setup Guide.
238
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
239
DEC Finnish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Finnish
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
240
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
French
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
French
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
241
DEC French Canadian
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC French Canadian
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
242
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
German
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
German
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
243
Italian
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
Italian
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
244
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
JIS Roman
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
JIS Roman
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
245
DEC Norwegian/Danish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Norwegian/Danish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
246
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
Spanish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
Spanish
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
247
DEC Swedish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Swedish
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
248
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
DEC Great Britain
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Great Britain
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
249
ISO Norwegian/Danish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Norwegian/Danish
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
250
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
DEC Dutch
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Dutch
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
251
DEC Swiss
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Swiss
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
252
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
DEC Portuguese
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Portuguese
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
253
VT100 Graphics
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
VT100 Graphics
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
254
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
DEC Supplemental
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Supplemental
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
255
DEC Technical
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
DEC Technical
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
256
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
ISO Katakana
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Katakana
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
257
7-Bit Hebrew
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
7-Bit Hebrew
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
258
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
7-Bit Turkish
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
7-Bit Turkish
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
259
Greek Supplemental
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
Greek Supplemental
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
260
Appendix A LG Emulation Character Set Charts
Hebrew Supplemental
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
Hebrew Supplemental
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
261
Turkish Supplemental
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
Turkish Supplemental
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
262
Appendix A LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
The following pages show the 96-Character Set charts (also referred to as
code pages) for the LG emulation. The character sets are shown in Near
Letter Quality (NLQ) print mode. These character sets may be selected using
the configuration menus, described in the
Setup Guide.
263
ISO Latin 1
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Latin 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
264
Appendix A LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
ISO Latin 2
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Latin 2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
265
ISO Latin 5
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Latin 5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
266
Appendix A LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
ISO Latin 9
ISO Latin 9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
267
ISO Cyrillic
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Cyrillic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
268
Appendix A LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
ISO Greek
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Greek
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
269
ISO Hebrew
GL01234567
GR89ABCDEF
ISO Hebrew
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
270
Appendix A LG Emulation 96-Character Sets
271
BInterface Configuration
with the VMS Operating
System
Parallel Interface
When using the parallel interface with the VMS operating system, configure
the printer with the SET PRINTER command, as shown below:
Printer LCA0:, device type unknown, is on-line, allocated record-oriented
device, carriage control, device is spooled through an intermediate device,
error logging is enabled.
Error count 0
Owner process “SYMBIONT_0001”
Owner process ID 00000087
Reference Count 2
Page width 132
Carriage return Formfeed
No passall No Wrap
No Fallback Tab
Intermediate device: DUA1
Associated queue: LCA0
Operations completed 1
Owner UIC [0, 0]
Dev Prot S:RWLP, 0:RWLP, W:RWLP
Default buffer size 132
Page length 66
Lowercase
Printall
No Truncate
272
Appendix B Serial Interface
Serial Interface
When using the serial interface with the VMS operating system, configure the
terminal characteristics with the SET TERM command, as shown below:
Terminal: _TXA3: Device_Type: Unknown Owner: SYMBIONT_0001
Username: SYSTEM
Input: 9600* LFfill: 0 Width: 132 Parity: None
Output: 9600* CRfill: 0 Page: 66
Terminal Characteristics:
Device spooled to _DUAL:
* Match baud rate to printer settings.
Interactive Echo Type_ahead No_Escape
No_Hostsync TTsync Lowercase Tab
No_Wrap Scope No_Remote No_Eightbit
No_Broadcast No_Readsync Form Fulldup
No_Modem No_Local_echo No_Autobaud No_Hangup
No_Brdcstambx No_DMA No_Altypeahd Set_speed
Line_Editing Overstrike_editing No_Fallback No_Dialup
No_Secure_server No_Disconnect No_Pasthru No_Syspassword
No_SIXEL_Graphics No_Soft_Characters No_Printer_Port Numeric_Keypad
No_ANSI_CRT No_Regis No_Block_mode No_Advanced_video
No_Edit_mode No_DEC_CRT No_DEC_CRT
273
CType Family IDs, Font IDs,
Font File IDs
“Built-In" Font File IDs
This appendix explains the values used in the font file identification strings
(IDs) for the font files stored in the printer. It also lists all the font file IDs
available in LG emulation mode.
The Font File ID Field Definitions table on page C-3 lists and defines all the
valuesinafontfileID.Thevaluesarebasedon36possiblevalues(0-9,A-Z).
The table shows the relationship between type family IDs, font IDs, and font
file IDs.
Notice, for example, that the 31-character font file ID also contains the type
family ID and font ID. The type family ID is field 1 (the first 7 characters) of
the 31-character font file ID. The font ID consists of fields 1 through 7 (the first
16 characters) of the 31-character font file ID.
274
Appendix C Font File ID Field Definitions
Font File ID Field Definitions
Bytes ValueField NameField Meaning
11to7 Type family ID R Registered internationally or in
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9to11
12
13 to 14
15
16
17 to 18
19 to 21
22 to 25
26 to 27
28
29
30
31
Spacing
Type Size
Scale Factor
Style
Weight
Proportion
Rotation
Character Set
Character
File encoding
Resolution
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
D
E
the public domain
DIGITAL reserved
5 pitch
02S
03C
050
K
00
G
G
00
ZZZZ
02
D
0
0
0
10 point
12 point
18 point
No scaling (1:1)
Normal
Regular
No rotation
Full character set subset
Binary (See NOTE below.)
200 dots per inch
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Regular
NOTE: This field is used only for the file name and not to distinguish
between a sixel file and a binar
y
file.
01 Italic
B 100 dots per inch
OtherZ
J
2
L
4
1
O
5
10 pitch
10.3 pitch
12 pitch
13.3 pitch
13.6 pitch
15 pitch
16.7 pitch
I
W
6 pitch
8.33 pitch
Font ID
G 7 pitch
01U
01O
01Q U.S. ASCII
DEC Supplemental
DEC Technical
GDE
GDO
GDI
GDK
GDP
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
01C VT100
24D
242
1TR
1TG
240
7-Bit Hebrew
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Supplemental
Hebrew Supplemental
Turkish Supplemental
275
Type Family IDs
The type families available in LG emulation mode have the following names
and identification strings:
The D in the ID string for DCRRSPN means the name Correspondence Print
is registered with Compaq, but is not registered internationally. The R in the
ID strings for OCR A and OCR B means these names are registered
internationally or are in the public domain.
Font File IDs
This section lists all type family names, type family IDs, font IDs, and font file
IDs available in LG emulation mode.
The 31-character font file ID also contains the type family ID and font ID. The
type family ID is the first 7 characters of the font file ID. The font ID is the first
16 characters of the 31-character font file ID.
Type Family Name Identification String (ID)
Compressed Print DCMPRSS
Correspondence Plot DCRRSPL
Correspondence Print DCRRSPN
Data Processing DBULTN1
Draft Plot DDRAFT0
High Speed Draft Print DDRAFT1
LG Near Letter Quality DLGNRLQ
Low Density Plot DLODENS
OCR A ROCRA00
OCR B ROCRB00
276
Appendix C Font File IDs
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch
512 U.S. ASCII
Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
Type Family ID: DBULTN1
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Supp.512 DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
12
12
12
12
12
12
5
5
5
5
5
5
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
612
DEC Supp.612
DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
12
12
12
12
12
12
6
6
6
6
6
6
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
10 12 DEC Supp.10 12 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
12
12
12
12
12
12
10
10
10
10
10
10
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
1. Type Family Name: DEC Built-in 1
(Data Processing)
VT1001210 DBULTN1 J 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
5 12 VT 100 DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
6 12 VT 100 DBULTN1 I 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
5 12 7-Bit Hebrew512 DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
512
512
512
512
7-Bit Turkish DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
Hebrew Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
Turkish Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
6 12 7-Bit Hebrew DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
12
612
612
612
7-Bit Turkish DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
Hebrew Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
Turkish Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
6
12 7-Bit Hebrew DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
12
12
12
12
7-Bit Turkish DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
Hebrew Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
Turkish Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
10
10
10
10
10
continued on next page
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
277
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
Type Family ID: DBULTN1
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
12 12 DEC Suppl.12 12 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
15 10 DEC Supp.15 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Built-in 1 continued
(Data Processing)
12 12 VT 100 DBULTN1 L 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
15 10 VT 100 DBULTN1 O 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
12
12
12
12
7-Bit Turkish DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
12 7-Bit Hebrew
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
12
12
12
12
12
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl. DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Hebrew
DBULTN1 E 03C K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
10
10
10
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
278
Appendix C Font File IDs
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch
510
Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
Type Family ID: DCRRSPN
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Supp.510 DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
610
DEC Supp.610
DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
6
6
6
6
6
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
10 10 DEC Supp.10 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
2. Type Family Name: Correspondence Print
5 10 VT 100 DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
6 10 VT 100 DCRRSPN I 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
10 10 VT 100 DCRRSPN J 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
510
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
10
10
10
10
10
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
continued on next page
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
279
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
Type Family ID: DCRRSPN
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
12 10 DEC Supp.12 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
12
12
12
12
12
12
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
Correspondence Print continued
15 10 DEC Supp.15 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
12 10 VT 100 DCRRSPN L 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
15 10 VT 100 DCRRSPN O 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
10
10
10
10
10
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
12
12
12
12
12
10
10
10
10
10
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCRRSPN E 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish
15
15
15
15
15
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
280
Appendix C Font File IDs
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID strin
g
10
Type Family ID: DCMPRSS
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Supp.8.33 10 DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS W 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
6.67 10 DEC Supp.6.67 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
6.67
6.67
6.67
6.67
6.67
6.67
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
8.33
5. Type Family Name: Compressed Print
Type Family ID: ROCRA00
10 10 ROCRA00 J 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
Type Family ID: ROCRB00
10 10 ROCRB00 J 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
3. Type Family Name: OCR A
4. Type Family Name: OCR B
8.33 10 VT 100 DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
6.67 10 VT 100 DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew10
10
10
10
6.67
6.67
6.67
6.67
6.67 10
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew10
10
10
10
10
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
8.33
continued on next page
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
281
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
Type Family ID: DCMPRSS
13.3 10 DEC Supp.13.3 10 DEC Tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
13.3
13.3
13.3
13.3
13.3
13.3
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
16.7 10 DEC Supp.16.7 10 DEC tech.
ISO Latin 2
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
ISO Latin 5
10
10
10
10
10
10
16.7
16.7
16.7
16.7
16.7
16.7
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG00GDEZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG00GDOZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG00GDIZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG00GDKZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG00GDPZZZZ 02Z000
Compressed Print continued
Type Family ID: DDRAFT1
10 12 DDRAFT1 J 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
6. Type Family Name: High Speed Draft Print
10 12 DEC Supp. DDRAFT1 J 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02Z000
16.7 10 VT 100 DCMPRSS 5 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
13.3 10 VT 100 DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02Z000
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew10
10
10
10
10
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
13.3
13.3
13.3
13.3
13.3
16.7
16.7
16.7
16.7
16.7
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
7-Bit Hebrew10
10
10
10
10
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG0024DZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG00242ZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TGZZZZ 02Z000
DCMPRSS 4 02S K 00GG00240ZZZZ 02Z000
7-Bit Turkish
DCMPRSS I 02S K 00GG001TRZZZZ 02Z000
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
282
Appendix C Font File IDs
Type Font File ID (entire string)Character
Pitch Size Set Font ID (First 16 characters)
Type Family ID: DDRAFT0
NOTE: The font file IDs are spaced for clarity. The spaces are not part of the actual ID stri
n
10 12 DEC Supp.10 12 DEC Tech.1210
DDRAFT0 J 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02B000
DDRAFT0 J 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02B000
DDRAFT0 J 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02B000
8. Type Family Name: Draft Plot
Type Family ID: DLODENS
10 10 DLODENS J 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02Z000
9. Type Family Name: Low Density Plot
Type Family ID: DCRRSPL
10 10 DEC Supp.10 10 DCRRSPL J 02S K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
DCRRSPL J 02S K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02D000
10. Type Family Name: Correspondence Plot
Type Family ID: DLGNRLQ
718
DEC Supp.718 DLGNRLQ G 050 K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
DLGNRLQ G 050 K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02D000
7. Type Family Name: LG Near Letter Quality
10 12 DEC Supp.10 12 DEC Tech.1210
DLGNRLQ J 03C K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
DLGNRLQ J 03C K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02D000
DLGNRLQ J 03C K 00GG0001QZZZZ 02D000
10 12 ASCII Italic
DEC Supp. Italic10 12 DLGNRLQ J 03C K 01GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
DLGNRLQ J 03C K 01GG0001OZZZZ 02D000
7 18 VT100
ISO Latin 1718 DLGNRLQ G 050 K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
DLGNRLQ G 050 K 00GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
VT1001010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
ISO Latin 11010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 00GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
VT100 Italic1010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 01GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
DEC Supp. Ital.1010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 01GG00010ZZZZ 02D000
ASCII Italic1010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 01GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
ISO Latin 1 Ital.1010 DCRRSPL J 02S K 01GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
VT10010 12 ISO Latin 11210 DDRAFT0 J 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02B000
DDRAFT0 J 03C K 00GG006DDZZZZ 02B000
VT1001210 DLGNRLQ J 03C K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
ISO Latin 11210 DLGNRLQ J 03C K 00GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
VT100 Italic1210 DLGNRLQ J 03C K 01GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
ISO Latin 1 Ital.10 12 DLGNRLQ J 03C K 01GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
14.1 5 VT100 DLGNRLQ N 01N K 00GG0001CZZZZ 02D000
14.1 5 DEC Supp. DLGNRLQ N 01N K 00GG0001OZZZZ 02D000
14.1 5 U.S. ASCII DLGNRLQ N 01N K 00GG0001UZZZZ 02D000
14.1 5 ISO Latin 1 DLGNRLQ N 01N K 00GG006DDZZZZ 02D000
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
U.S. ASCII
283
DPrint Samples
Introduction
This appendix contains sample programs that illustrate how to use LG control
sequences and bar code control sequences in applications.
LG control sequences are described in Chapter 2, “LG Emulation Control
Codes." Bar code control sequences are described in Chapter 4, “Bar Codes."
NOTE: The print samples in this appendix were printed on a DEC LG
Emulation printer.
Creating Block Characters
The block character examples use the following escape sequences:
ESC[P1;P2'r Set Block Character Parameters (DECBCS)
ESC%SP1Start Block Character Mode (DECBLOCKC)
ESC%@Stop Block Character Mode
The following command sequences create the block characters shown in
Figure D-1:
Black Characters, White Background
CSI3;3;0;0;0'r
ESC% 1BLOCK CHARACTERSESC%@
White Characters, Black Background
CSI4;2;1;0;0'r
ESC% 1BLACK BACKGROUNDESC%@
Landscape Character Orientation
CSI2;4;0;0;2'r
ESC% 1LANDSCAPEESC%@
284
Appendix D Creating Block Characters
Figure 4. Block Characters
285
Bar Codes
Bar code escape sequences determine the type of bar code, its attributes,
and start and stop bar code printing. Bar code escape sequences are defined
in Chapter 4.
The bar code examples in this section use the following escape sequences:
CSIP1;P2; ... P9'q Select Bar Code Attributes
(DECSBCA)
ESC%SP0 Start Bar Coding (DECBARC)
ESC%@ Stop Bar Coding
Interleaved 2 of 5
The following command sequences create the bar code shown in Figure D-2.
The bar code is oriented portrait and coded to include human-readable
characters in the OCR-A font.
CSI1;;;;;;;;3'q
ESC% 00123456789ESC%@
Figure 5. Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code
Code 39
The following command sequences create the bar code shown in Figure D-3.
This bar code is rotated -90 degrees for landscape orientation and is coded to
include human-readable characters in the currently active font.
CSI2;;;;;;;2;2'q
ESC% 00123456789ABCESC%@
286
Appendix D Bar Codes
Figure 6. Code 39 Bar Code
287
Logos
The following command sequences create the logo graphic shown in Figure
D-4:
DCS0;1&t400016Square00086
250;1;1500\
333;1;250;1000;250\
333;1;250;333;333;333;250\
333;1;250;1000;250\
250;1;1500\
ST
CSI1&}
Figure 7. Box Logo
288
Appendix D Sixel Graphics
Sixel Graphics
The command sequences listed below create the sixel graphics output shown
in Figure D-5:
Figure 8. Sixel Graphic
289
Forms
The memo form shown in Figure D-6 was created with the program illustrated
below.
ESCcDCS0;3&p04Memo%@00234
%1B[2g%1B[11l%1B[5;127s%1B[2;66r%1B[45u
********************%0D%0A
*digital*%09INTEROFFICE MEMO%0D%0A
********************%0D%0A%0A
TO:@%09DATE:@
%09FROM:@
%09DEPT:@
%09EXT: @
%09LOC/MAIL STOP:@
%09ENG.NET.:@%1B[ 2e
SUBJECT:@%0D%1B[ 2e
@ST
DCS0;64&rMemoSTTest and Verification@20 March 1995
@Jane Doe
@Engineering
@555-0009
@ENG/HDO
@NODE::SMITHDCS0&qMemoST
@LG PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
@Please do a performance analysis on the following
functions.
ESC#1
290
Appendix D Forms
Figure 9. Memo Form
291
The payroll deduction form shown in Figure D-7 (see page D-12) was created
with the program illustrated below.
CSI 300 ; 5000s CSI300;6300r
DCS 0 ; 3&p07Payroll^~01367
^1B [11h^1B [7 I
^1B [ 0 ; 200 ; 1100 ; 4600 ; 5!
^1B [ 0; 4800 ; 1100 ; 5000 ; 5!
^1B [0 ; 200 ; 6100 ; 4605 ; 5!
^1B [0 ; 200 ; 1100 ; 5000 ; 5!
^1B [300 ` ^1B [1300d ^1B [3&}
^1B[2;2;0;0;0`r
^1B [ 300 ` ^1B [ 1500d^09^09^09^1B[ 2 ; 2 ; 0 ; 0 ;0 'r^1B% 1PAYROLL
DEDUCTIONS^1B%@
^1B [ 0 ;300 ; 1900 ; 4400 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 2600 ; 4400 ; 10!
^1B [ 1600 `^1B [ 2000d ^1B[ 2 ; 1 ; 0 ; 0 ;0 ' r ^1B% 1INSTRUCTIONS
^1B%@
^1B [ 300 ` ^1B [ 2300d1. Complete the Appropriate section(s) below.
^1B [ 300 `^1B [ 2400d2. Be sure to sign,date and write your employee
number
^1B [ 300 `^1B [ 2500d in each section you complete.
^1B [ 600 `^1B [ 2700d^1B% 1EMPLOYEE'S WITHHOLDING
EXEMPTION^1B%@
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 2900 ; 2000 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 4300 ; 2000 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 2900 ; 1400 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 2300 ; 2900 ; 1400 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 3100 ; 2000 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 420 ; 3300 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 420 ; 3500 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 1 ; 420 ; 3300 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 1 ; 620 ; 3300 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 0 ; 420 ; 3600 ; 200 ; 101
^1B [ 0 ; 420 ; 3800 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 1 ; 420 ; 3600 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [ 1 ; 620 ; 3600 ; 200 ; 10!
^1B [0;420;3900;200;10!
^1B [0;420;4100;200;10!
^1B [1;420;3900;200;10!
^1B [1;620;3900;200;10!
292
Appendix D Forms
^1B [ 0 ; 300 ; 4800 ; 2000 ; 10!
^1B [ 2300 ` ^1B[ 4790d Date
^1B [ 0 ; 2600 ; 4800 ; 1000 ;'10!
^1B [ 1050 `^1B [ 3050dTax Status
^1B [ 650 `^1B [ 3400dSingle
^1B [ 650 `^1B [ 3700dMarried
^1B [ 650 `^1B [4000dMarried/higher single rate
^1B [ 300 `^1B[5200dEmployee Signature
^1B[0;;;;;;;1;2'q
^1B [ 2400 ` ^ 1B [ 5500d
^1B% 00123456789 ^1B%@
^1B [ 470 ` ^1B [ 3350d ^1B% 1~ ^1B%@
^1B [ 470 ` ^1B [ 3650d ^1B% 1~ ^1B%@
^1B [ 470 `^1B [3950d ^1B% 1~^1B%@
^1B [ 300` ^1B [4790d~
^1B [2700`^1B [ 4790d~
^0
ST
CSI 18m CSI 70h
DCS0;126&rPayroll STX~~~John Q.Smith~Jan28, 1995 ESC#1
293
Figure 10. Payroll Deduction Form
294
Appendix D Vertical Format Unit (VFU)
Vertical Format Unit (VFU)
The following command sequences create the vertical formatting shown in
Figure D-8:
ESC[<1hA@@@@@B@@@@@D@@@@` ESC[<1l
ESC[002&y ESC[5`Channel 3 line 7
ESC[900&y ESC[5`TOF line 1
ESC[002&y ESC[25`Channel 3 line 7
ESC[901&y ESC[25`Channel 2 line 4
ESC[011&y ESC[5`Bottom of form
CR FF
Figure 11. Vertical Format Unit (VFU)
295
EGlossary
A
active column The horizontal location on the paper where the next
character will print. After printing a character, the
printer advances the active column.
active line The vertical location on the paper where the next
character will print. After printing a line, the printer
advances the active line.
active position The position on the paper where the next character will
print. The active position is defined by the horizontal
position (active column) and the vertical position
(active line).
ASCII
Abbrev. for
American Standard Code for Information
Interchange.
attributes, print Operations performed on text that alter its appearance
but do not change the font. Examples: underlining,
superscripting, bold, etc.
B
bar code A printed code consisting of parallel bars of varied
width and spacing and designed to be read by a one-
dimensional scanning device.
baud A unit of speed that measures the rate at which
information is transferred. Baud rate is the reciprocal of
the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used to
carry data. For example, a system in which the shortest
pulse is 1/1200 second operates at 1200 baud. On RS-
232 serial lines, the baud rate equals the data flow rate
in bits per second (bps). To communicate properly, a
printer must be configured to operate at the same baud
rate as its host computer.
bit
Contraction of
binary digit. A digit in the binary (base 2)
number system: 0 or 1. A bit is the smallest unit of
storage in a digital computer, where 0 and 1 are
represented by different voltages. Groups of bits form
other units of storage called
nibbles, bytes, and words.
bold A dark thick character weight produced by a double
strike print method.
See also
shadow printing,
character weight.
296
Appendix E Glossary
Boot-up The start-up procedure which causes a computer
operating system to be loaded into main memory.
buffer A reserved area in printer memory that data is written
to and read from during data transfers.
C
character cell The invisible rectangular space occupied by a
character, including the white space around the
character. Used as a unit of spacing. The height of a
cell is equal to the current line spacing, and the width of
a cell is equal to the current character spacing.
character proportion The ratio of character height to character width.
See also
compressed and expanded
.
character set Instructions telling the printer how to construct a related
group of printable characters, including symbols,
punctuation, numbers, diacritical markings, and
alphabet characters. Each character in a set is
assigned a unique address in memory.
character weight The degree of lightness and thickness of printed text.
For example: Bold refers to a heavy or thick character
weight. Medium, normal, or book weight refer to the
character weight used in this sentence.
control sequence Two or more bytes that instruct the printer to perform a
special function. A control sequence begins with the
control sequence introducer, CSI, in an 8-bit data
environment. A control sequence can also be an
escape sequence, however, because the 8-bit CSI
control character can be represented by the 7-bit
escape sequence, ESC [.
compressed Refers to a typeface with a smaller than normal
character width, but no change to character height.
cpi
Abbrev. for
characters per inch: a measurement of
monospaced fonts indicating the horizontal character
density. For example, 10 cpi is 10 characters produced
in a one-inch (horizontal) space.
CSI
Abbrev. for
Control Sequence Introducer: A non-
printing control character (decimal 155, hex 9B) that is
always the first byte of a control sequence in an 8-bit
data environment. See also Control sequence.
D
data bits Binary information sent to the printer; a character set
grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation
marks to be printed, or control codes to move paper or
position the text on the page.
decipoint One tenth of a point. A unit of measurement equal to 1/
720 inch.
See also
point.
297
default A value, parameter, attribute, or option assigned by a
program or system when another is not specified by
the user.
diagnostic Pertains to the detection and isolation of printer
malfunctions or mistakes.
DIP Dual In-line Package: a method of packaging
semiconductor components in rectangular cases with
parallel rows of electrical contacts.
DIP switch A DIP equipped with toggle switches.
disable To deactivate or set to OFF.
DP
Abbrev. for
data processing font (see HS).
E
EIA/TIA
Abbrev. for Electronics Industries Association.
Elite A name indicating a monospaced font with 12 cpi pitch
(and usually 10 points in height).
Em A font width term equal to the maximum character
width obtainable in a given font. (Derived from the
width of an uppercase M, usually the widest character
in a set.)
emulation Refers to the ability of a printer to execute the
commands of another printer language or protocol.
En A font width term equal to one half em.
enable To activate or set to ON.
escape sequence Two or more bytes that describe a specific printer
control function. In an escape sequence, the first byte
is always the ASCII ESC character (decimal 27, hex
1B).
See also control sequence.
expanded Refers to larger-than-normal character width with no
change in character height.
F
false Off or zero.
Compare true.
family (or type) A set of all variations and sizes of a type style.
fixed-pitch fonts
See font, monospaced.
298
Appendix E Glossary
font The complete set of a given
size
of type, including
characters, symbols, figures, punctuation marks,
ligatures, signs, and accents. To fully describe a font,
seven characteristics are usually specified:
1) Type family
2) Spacing (proportional or monospaced)
3) Type size (12 point, 14 point, etc.)
4) Scale factor (character height/width ratio)
5) Type style
6) Character weight
7) Character proportion (normal, condensed,
expanded).
font name
See typeface.
font pattern A font pattern is the matrix of pels which represents a
character, symbol, or image.
font, landscape A font printed parallel to the long edge of a page, or a
font capable of being produced on a landscape page
orientation.
font, monospaced Also called fixed-pitch fonts. Every character,
regardless of actual horizontal size, occupies the same
amount of font pattern space. All monospaced fonts
use specific pitch size settings. Monospaced fonts are
sometimes used when strict character alignment is
desired (tables, charts, spreadsheets, etc.).
font, portrait A font printed parallel to the short edge of a page.
font, proportional A font in which the width of the character cell varies
with the width of the character. For example, “i” takes
less space to print than “m.” Using proportional fonts
generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance. This
manual is printed in proportional fonts.
font weight
See character weight.
font width The measurement of the width of a character cell in
dots.
G
GL Characters Graphic left: Graphic left characters map half of the
character set table. The GL characters reside at 0 - 127
hex and comprise the ASCII portion of the table.
GR Characters Graphic right: Graphic right characters map half of the
character set table. The GR characters reside at 128 -
255 hex and comprise the LG portion of the table.
299
H
hex codes Codes based on a numeral system with a radix of 16.
hex dump A hex dump is a translation of all host interface data to
its hexadecimal equivalent. A hex dump is a printer
self-test typically used to troubleshoot printer data
reception problems.
HGS
Abbrev. for Horizontal Grid Size
host computer The host computer stores, processes, and sends data
to be printed, and which communicates directly with the
printer. The term host indicates the controlling
computer, since modern printers are themselves
microprocessor-controlled computer systems.
Hz
Abbrev. for Hertz. Cycles per second, a measure of
frequency.
IIGP Intelligent Graphics Processor. An interface that
converts graphics commands received from the host
computer to binary plot data that is usable by the
printer.
interface The hardware components used to link two devices by
common physical interconnection, signal, and
functional characteristics.
See also Printer Interface.
invoke To put into effect or operation.
ipm
Abbrev. for inches per minute: The speed at which
graphics are plotted.
italic A type style in which the characters are slanted.
This
sentence is set in italics. Compare Roman.
L
landscape Printed perpendicular to the paper motion.
LCD
Abbrev. for
liquid-crystal display. The LCD is located
on the control panel. Its purpose is to communicate
information to the operator concerning the operating
state of the printer.
LED
Abbrev. for
light-emitting diode. The printer control
panel has LEDs that indicate the status of the printer to
the operator.
logical link The parameters that specify data transfer, control, or
communication operations.
lpi
Abbrev. for
lines per inch. A measurement indicating
the vertical spacing between successive lines of text.
For example, 8 lpi means eight lines of text for every
vertical inch.
lpm
Abbrev. for
lines per minute. A measurement of the
print speed of a line printer printing in text print mode.
300
Appendix E Glossary
M
macro A macro is a collection of control codes, escape
sequences, and data whose execution can be initiated
by using a single command. This information is
downloaded into the printer.
memory
See RAM.
monospaced
See font, monospaced.
N
NLQ
Abbrev. for
near letter quality font.
non impact Printing which does not result from any mechanical
impact onto the paper. Example: an
electrophotographic printer.
nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be
preserved when the printer is turned off, such as
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.
Nonvolatile memory is preserved by means of an
independent, battery-operated power supply. When
printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the
power needed to keep stored data active.
NOVRAM
Acronym for
nonvolatile random access memory. See
also nonvolatile memory.
O
OCR Optical Character Recognition is the process by which
a machine reads characters printed in a special
standardized font. Data are read by a photoelectric
optical scanner and recorded on magnetic tape or disk.
OCR-A and OCR-B are two widely used fonts.
off-line The non-printing operational state of the printer. When
the printer is off-line, communication between the
printer and the host computer is temporarily stopped
and the message “Off-line/Emulation” appears on the
display. Non-printing operations, such as printer
configuration, paper loading, changing the ribbon, etc.,
are done with the printer off-line.
on-line The printing state. When the printer is on-line, it is
ready to receive data and control commands from the
host computer, and prints the data immediately. “On-
line” appears on the message display and the control
panel status lamps illuminate continuously.
ON LINE A switch on the operator control panel that toggles the
printer between the on-line and off-line states.
301
P
parity (check) Parity checking is the addition of non-data bits to data,
resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always
even or always odd. Parity is used to detect
transmission errors. Parity represents the value in the
check digit of the received or transmitted data.
parsing Parsing is the process of separating a programming
statement into basic units that can be translated into
machine instructions. A printer can recover from an
erroneous code sequence by performing as much of
the function as possible or, parsing the valid parameter
from the invalid.
PCBA
Abbrev. for printed circuit board assembly.
pel
See pixel.
PI Paper instruction: A signal from the host with the same
timing and polarity as the data lines.
Pica A name indicating a monospaced font with a pitch of 10
cpi and usually a 12 point height. Pica is also used in
typography as a unit of measurement: 1 pica = 1/6
inch.
pin configuration Establishes the physical attachment and protocol
conversion connections for the host interface.
pitch The number of text characters printed per horizontal
inch. Specified in characters per inch or cpi.
pixel Acronym of picture element or picture cell. Also called
a pel. The smallest displayable picture element on a
video monitor or printable unit in a printer.
point A unit of measure in printing and typography, used to
specify type sizes, heights of font characters, etc.
There are 72 points in a vertical inch; thus, one point
equals 1/72 inch, or approximately 0.0138 inch.
Examples: This is 6 point type. This is 11 point type. This is
16 point type.
port A channel used for receiving data from or transmitting
data to one or more external devices.
printer configuration The operating properties that define how the printer
responds to signals and commands received from the
host computer. These properties are set to match the
operating characteristics of the host computer system.
printer interface The point where the data line from the host computer
plugs into the printer.
protocol A set of rules or conventions governing the exchange
of information between computer systems. For
computer printers, a protocol is the coding convention
used to convey and print data. A printer protocol
302
Appendix E Glossary
includes character codes, printer function codes, and
machine-to-machine communication codes.
R
RAM Acronym
for
random-access memory. Also called
“main memory” or “working memory.” RAM is the active
memory of a printer, into which programs are loaded.
This memory can be read from or written to at any time.
RAM is also termed “volatile” because whatever
information is in RAM is lost when power is turned off
or interrupted.
See also ROM.
read To retrieve data from memory or mass storage (hard
disk,floppydiskette,RAM,etc.).
reset To turn off, deactivate, disable, or return to a previous
state.
resolution A measure expressing the number of component units
in a given range used to create an image; in printing,
expressed as the number of dots per inch (dpi)
horizontally and vertically.
ROCS Return from Other Coding System: A control sequence
that allows you to return the printer to the previous
emulation from any point in the printer's configuration.
ROM
Acronym for
read-only memory. Programs,
instructions, and routines permanently stored in the
printer. Information in ROM is not lost when power is
turned off. ROM cannot be written to-hence the term
“read-only.”
SeealsoRAM.
roman A type style in which characters are upright. This
sentence is printed in a roman type style.
Compare
Italic.
S
sans serif A typeface or font in which the characters do not have
serifs. This font is sans serif.
serial communicationsThe sequential transmission of data, in which each
element (bit) is transferred in succession.
303
serial matrix Refers to the manner in which text characters are
printed. In a serial matrix printer, a moving printhead
uses pins to form whole characters one at a time and
one after the other. The pins print dots according to
programmed matrix patterns. Although data are sent to
the printer interface either a serially or in parallel, the
printhead receives the data serially in order to form
each character. The DEC LG Emulation printer also
forms characters with dots in matrix patterns, but it
feeds print data in parallel to many hammers mounted
on a rapidly oscillating shuttle. The hammers fire
simultaneously to print entire lines at a time.
serif A short line stemming from and at an angle to the
upper or lower end of the stroke of a letter or number
character.
set To turn on, activate, invoke, or enable.
SFCC
Abbrev. for
special function control character. The first
character in a printer command sequence. In P-Series
emulation mode, you can select one of five characters
as the SFCC. In Epson FX and Proprinter emulation
mode, the SFCC must always be the ASCII ESC
character.
See also command sequence and escape
sequence.
shadow printing A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced by
doublestriking. The printer forms a character, then
prints it again, but fractionally offset from the first
position.
See also bold, character weight.
sixel A vertical column consisting of six pixels and treated as
a unit in graphics applications.
size, type
See point.
slewing Rapid vertical paper movement.
SOCS Select Other Coding System: A control sequence that
allows you to enable another emulation.
spacing
See font, proportional and font, monospaced.
SSCC
Abbrev. for SuperSet Control Code. It is of the form | } ;
and is used to execute superset commands.
start bit In serial data transfer, a signal indicating the beginning
of a character or data element.
stop bit In serial data transfer, a signal indicating the end of a
character or data element.
string Two or more bytes of data or code treated as a unit.
A
seri
f
304
Appendix E Glossary
style, type
See type style.
superset commands Commands which are an extension to the base
LinePrinter+ printer protocol, such as the bar code
commands for the Epson FX protocol.
symbol set
See character set.
T
type family
See
typeface
.
type size
See
point
.
type style Refers to either the upright or italic character style in a
specific font family. Roman is upright,
italic is slanted.
typeface A descriptive name or brand name that identifies a
particular design of type. Examples are: Courier,
Helvetica, and Swiss. Also called type family.
typographic font
See
font,proportional.
V
VFU
Abbrev. for
vertical format unit.
W
weight
See character weight.
write To store data to memory (RAM) or to mass storage
(hard disk, floppy diskette, etc.).
X
X-off A character transmitted by the printer announcing that
the printer is off-line or the buffer is almost full (DC3 -
13 Hex).
X-on A character transmitted by the printer announcing that
the printer is on-line or the buffer is almost empty (DC1
-11Hex).
307
Index
A
Active Column and Active Line (Cursor Motion),89
Application Program Commands,135
ASCII
Control Characters,134
Control Codes,23
Attributes
Character, 116
Turn Off All,122
Autowrap Mode (DECAWM),43
B
Backward Compatibility,85
Bar Code Characteristics, 208
Bar Code Styles, 211
Codabar a/t,213
Codabar b/n,214
Codabar c/*, 214
Codabar d/e,215
Code 11,213
Code 128 - UCC, 228
Code 128 - USS, 220
Code 39,211
EAN-13379, 216
EAN-8,215
Extended Code 39,211
Interleaved 2 of 5, 216
Postnet, 220
UPC-A,217
UPC-E,218
Bar Codes, 203
CCEC,205
CENTER Code Character, 209
Checksums,209
Control Character Encoding Character, 205
DECBARC,207
DECSBCA, 203, 207
Density and Spacing,229
Intercharacter Gap, 209
Multiples, 210
Parity,209
Print samples, 285
Quiet Zone,209
Return from Other Coding System,207
ROCS, 207
Select Bar Codes Attributes Sequence,203
Start Bar Coding, 207
START Code Character,209
STOP Code Characters, 209
Block Character Mode
Start,140
Stop, 140
Block Characters,138
Print samples, 283
Bold Printing, 119, 120
C
Carriage Return/New Line Mode (DECCRNLM),42
Caution notice description,13
Channel Command,64
Character
Attributes,116
Character Expansion
multiply width,118
Character Expansion (GSM),117
Character Set Selection, 99, 151
Character Set Sequences, Select, 100
Character Set (DEC Multinational)
DEC British, 155
308
Index
DEC Dutch, 156
DEC Finnish, 156
DEC French (Canadian),157
DEC Norwegian/Danish, 158, 160
DEC Portuguese,160
DEC Swedish, 159
DEC Swiss, 159
French,156
German,157
Italian,157
JIS Roman,158
Spanish,158
Character Sets, 231
LG emulation character set charts,231
LG Special Character Sets and ISO Charts,
237, 262
Characters
Building Mathematical, 201
Control,23
Parameter,29
Printable,20
Clear
Tab,98
Codabar a/t,213
Codabar b/n,214
Codabar c/*, 214
Codabar d/e,215
Code V printer emulation,15
Code 11,213
Code 128
automatic mode, 222
manual mode, 222
manual mode operation,222
mode selection,222
subset A,224
subset B and C, 223
Code 128 - UCC, 228
Code 128 - USS, 220
Code 39,211
Codes
Additional Control Codes,23
ASCII Control,23
Control Code Conversion,28
Control, defined,23
Control, How Described in This Manual,34
Index, LG emulation,35
Control
Code Conversion,28
Codes, How Described in This Manual,34
Sequences,29
Control Codes
Index, LG emulation,35
Converting Control Codes,28
CSI
(Control Sequence Introducer),29
Cursor Motion,89
Cursor Up (CUU),94
CUU,94
Cyrillic Character Set, ISO,162
D
DA, 102, 104
DEC Supplemental Graphic Character Set,176
DEC Technical Character Set, 183
DECATFF,110
DECAWM,43
DECBCS,138
DECBLOCKC,140
DECCRNLM,42
DECDFM,73
DECDLG,78
DECFMSR,75
DECFPM,47
DECFSR, 115
DECIFM,72
DECILG,78
DECIPEM, 142
DECLFF,113
DECLFM,67
DECLGSR,79
DECLLG,76
DECPSM,44
DECRFMS,75
DECRFS, 114
DECRLGS,79
309
DECSGD,52
DECSHORP,60
DECSHTS,96
DECSLPP,86
DECSLRM,88
DECSPO,45
DECSTBM,87
DECSTR,141
DECSVTS,97
DECTFM,73
DECVEC,137
DECVERP,58
DEC, Special Character Sets,161
Default Values and States
LG emulation,146
Delete Forms Sequence (DECDFM),73
Density, Graphics (setting),52
Density, Plot (setting),51
Device Control Strings, 135
Device Status Requests (DSRs) and Printer
Responses, 105
Diagnostic features,16
Documentation
overview of each chapter,13
Double Underlined Text,121
Draft Mode
Enter,145
Exit,145
Drawing Vectors (DECVEC), 137
DSR,105
E
EAN-13, 216
EAN-8,215
End Load Vertical Format Unit,63
Escape
Control Sequences,29
Sequences
LG emulation,28
Sequences, defined,28
Extended Code 39,211
F
Features list
diagnostics,16
graphics and vertical formatting,16
printer emulations,15
text formatting and language options,15
Font
Assign type family or font, 110
Assigning and selecting font files,109
Deleting fonts from RAM,113
Font status report,115
Requestfontstatus, 114
Selecting fonts for printing,112
Status sequences,113
Type family, font, and font file IDs,273
Force Plot Mode (DECFPM),47
Form Status Report (DECRFMS),75
Form Types,71
Format, Vertical,61
Forms,66
Print samples, 289
Form, Data String,70
Forward Index (IND),89
G
GCR,134
Glossary, 295
GNL,134
Graphic Carriage Return (GCR),134
Graphic New Line,134
Graphic Size Modification (GSM),50
Graphic Size Selection (GSS),49
Graphic Substitute,134
Graphic Symbols for ASCII Character Set,152
Graphics and vertical formatting,16
Greek Character Set, ISO, 165
Greek Supplemental Character Set,193
GSM, 50, 117
GSS,49
H
Hebrew Character Set, ISO,168
310
Index
Hebrew Supplemental Character Set,196
Horizontal
Tab Stops, Set,96,97
Horizontal Position
Backward (HPB),92
Relative (HPR),91
HPA,91
HPB,92
HPR,91
HTS,97
I
IBM Proprinter Emulation
Select via DECIPEM, 142
Select via SOCS,143
Identification, Product, 102, 104
Important notice description,13
IND,89
Interfaces
VMS configuration, 271
Interleaved 2 of 5, 216
ISO Character Sets,161
ISO Cyrillic,162
ISO Greek, 165
ISO Hebrew, 168
ISO Latin 2, 170
ISO Latin 5, 173
ISO Katakana Character Set, 185
Italic Printing, 17, 18, 121
J
JFY,124
Justification (JFY),124
L
Language Selection,151
Latin 2 Character Set, ISO,170
Latin 5 Character Set, ISO,173
Left and Right Margins, Set,88
Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM),41
Lines per minute (lpm), defined,16
LNM,41
Load
End VFU loading,63
Forms Sequence (DECLFM),67
Vertical Format Unit (VFU),62
Logos
Print samples, 287
Logos (LG emulation)
Deleting Sequence (DECDLG),78
Loading Sequence (DECLLG),76
Select Sequence (DECILG),78
Status Report (DECLGSR),79
Status Request (DECRLGS),79
M
Manual Mode, 222
Margins
Page Print Area and Margins,80
Set Top and Bottom,87
Mode
manual (Code 128),222
Multiply Character Width,118
N
National Replacement Character,155
NEL,90
Next Line (NEL),90
NRC, 155
Numeric Character Location Listing, 152
Numeric Parameters, 134
O
OCR-A and OCR-B,151
Operating System Commands, 135
Overlined, 122
P
Page Format Select (PFS),82
Page Print Area and Margins,80
Parameter Separator, 134
Parameters
Numeric and Selective (Pn, Ps),30
Parsing Requirements,32
Partial Line Down (PLD) - Subscripting,95
Partial Line Up (PLU) - Superscripting,94
311
PFS,82
PGL (Printronix Graphics Language) emulation,15
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM),44
PLD,95
Plot Density, Setting,51
PLU,94
Pn, Ps See Parameters,30
Position Unit Mode (PUM),46
Postnet, 220
Print Area
Changing the,81
Page,80
Printer
Default Values and States
LG emulation,146
emulations,15
Interface configuration with the VMS operating
system,271
Reset, 141
speed,16
Status Requests and Reports,104
Printer emulations
Epson FX-1050,15
LG emulation,15
PGL,15
Proprinter XL,15
P-Series,15
VGL,15
Printer Reset,141
Printer Status Reports,105
Printing
Bold, 119, 120
Italic, 17, 18, 121
Privacy Messages, 135
Product Identification (DA), 102, 104
Protocol Selector,127
PUM,46
Q
Quiet Zone Setting (Bar Codes), 204
R
Raster Attributes, Set, 132
Rates, printing and plotting,16
Repeat Introducer (!) and Sequence,131
Report
Printer Status, 105
Request Forms Status (DECFMSR),75
Request Logo Status (DECRLGS),79
Reset Terminal, Soft (DECSTR),141
Reset to Initial State (RIS),141
Reset, Printer,141
Response, Printer, to DSR, 105
Reverse Index (RI),90
RI,90
Right (and Left) Margins, Set,88
RIS,141
S
SCS,100
Select Character Set Sequences (SCS),100
Select Horizontal (Character) Spacing (SHS),59
Select Size Unit (SSU),48
Select Vertical (Line) Spacing (SVS),57
Selecting Character Sets,99
Selecting Graphic Character Sets,22
Set Graphics Density (DECSGD),52
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP),60
Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM),88
Set Lines Per Physical Page (DECSLPP),86
Set Page Orientation (DECSPO),45
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM),87
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP),58
Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS),97
Setting Block Character Parameters (DECBCS),
138
Set/Reset Mode,40
SGR, 112
SHS,59
Sixel Graphics
Control Codes,130
Definition,126
Exit Sixel Mode,134
Picture Data,129
Print sample,288
Printable Characters,130
312
Index
Processing,126
Protocol Selector,127
String Introducer, 127
String Terminator,129
SOCS,143
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR),141
Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI),55
Spacing, text,54
Special Graphic Character Set, VT100 (DEC),179
SPI,55
SSU,48
Start Forms Sequence (DECIFM),72
States, Default Values and
LG emulation,146
Status
Printer, Requests and Reports,104
Stop Bar Coding,207
String Introducer, 127
Subscripting,95
Superscripting,94
Supplemental Graphic Character Set, DEC,176
SVS,57
T
Tab
Clear (TBC),98
Stops,95
Stops, Set,96,97
TBC,98
Technical Character Set, DEC, 183
Terminate Forms Sequence (DECTFM),73
Text formatting and language options,15
Turkish Supplemental Character Set,198
Turn Off All Attributes,122
U
Underlined Text,123
Underlining,121
Unused Control Strings,135
UPC-A,217
UPC-E,218
UPS,155
User-Preference Supplemental Character Set,155
V
Values and States, Default
LG emulation, 146
Vectors, Drawing,137
Vertical Format,61
Vertical Format Unit (VFU),294
Vertical Position Absolute (VPA),92
Vertical Position Backward (VPB),93
Vertical Position Relative (VPR),93
Vertical Tab Stops,98
VFU, End,63
VFU, Load,62
VMS interface configuration,271
VPA,92
VPB,93
VPR,93
VTS,98
VT100 Special Graphic Character Set, DEC, 179
W
Warning notice description,13
Z
7-Bit and 8-Bit Transmissions and Interpretations,
144
7-Bit Hebrew Character Set,187
7-Bit Turkish Character Set, 190
Printronix, Inc.
14600 Myford Road
P.O. Box 19559
Irvine, CA 92623-9559
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Technical Support: (714) 368-2686
172288-001A
Printronix
Nederland BV
P.O. Box 163, Nieuweweg 283
NL-6600 Ad Wijchen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix A.G.
42 Changi South
Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 542-0110
Fax: (65) 542-0220
Visit our Web site at:
www.printronix.com

Navigation menu